Home

User Manual - GE Digital Energy

1. Site Configuration Data about the site parameters Active Alarms List of active alarms Performance Monitor Network performance data over defined time periods Monitor Detailed event data record gt To get diagnostics 1 From the Help menu choose Get Diagnostics Information she Diagnostics Information File Help gt fal 4 Start File Path Close Available Data System Data Link Information Events Log M Site Configuration M Active Alarms M Performance Monitor Monitor File Path d My Documents Diagnostic Information txt Figure 9 1 Get Diagnostics Dialog Box 2 Select or deselect the data options If the file is to be sent to Cus tomer Support leave all options checked 3 Click File Path to specify the folder in which you want to save the file and then click Start to save the information The file is saved in the specified folder as Diagnostics Informa tion txt Link Compatibility Link Compatibility indicates the version compatibility using software traps As new hardware or software is added to existing networks compatibility issues may arise An incompatibility issue is indicated to the user by a change of color of the Link Status box on the Main Menu window Trap mes Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 2 TDM Loopbacks Chapter 9 sages can be viewed in the Events Log indicate the problems or limitations and suggest upgrades when appropriate The
2. Resetting the link causes service disconnection To maintain the connection between the managing computer and Caution the link first reset Site B gt To reset the link preserving current configuration 1 From Maintenance on the main window reset the remote unit 2 From Maintenance on the main window reset the local unit gt To reset to Factory Defaults 1 Choose either of the sites to be reset The Configuration dialog box opens 2 Choose Operations in the Configuration dialog box Site Configuration File Actions Help Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off g Installation Mode Factory Settings Q Air Interface Restore to Factory Default Settings will bring down the connection 2 Hub Site Sync D Site Configuration dialog box will be closed B Management Inventory Er Restore Defaults Security Date amp Time Advanced ak Ethernet amp TDM Services DY External Alarms IDU Detection Mode Enabled Figure 8 18 Site Configuration Reset to factory defaults 3 Click the Restore Defaults button A message box asking if you want to restore factory default settings appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 19 IDU Detection Chapter 8 Are you sure you want to Restore Factory Default Settings The link may be unreachable after the process This process takes several seconds and is followed by device reset Default IP Address 10 0 0 12
3. Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 N 5 Wiring Specifications ODU IDU Cable The ODU IDU cable is shielded outdoor class CAT 5e 4 twisted pair 24 AWG terminated with RJ 45 connectors on both ends A cable gland on the ODU side provides hermetic sealing The following table shows the connector pinout Table 0 1 ODU IDU RJ 45 Connector Pinout Ethernet RxN White Green 1 1 Ethernet RxT Green 2 2 Ethernet TXT White Orange 3 3 Ethernet TxN Orange 6 6 Power Blue 4 4 Power White Blue 5 5 Power White Brown 7 7 Power Brown 8 8 User Port Connectors LAN Port The LAN 10 100BaseT interface terminates in an 8 pin RJ 45 connector wired in accordance to Table 0 2 Table 0 2 Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout Transmit Data positive TD 1 Transmit Data negative TD 2 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 O 1 LAN Port for PoE 8 Appendix O Table 0 2 Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout Continued Receive Data positive RD 3 Receive Data negative RD 6 LAN Port for PoE 8 When connecting the PoE 8 LAN port cable directly to PC a crossed LAN cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors on both ends must be used wired according to Table 0 3 Table 0 3 Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout Ethernet RxN White Green 3 Ethernet RxT Green 6 Ethernet TXT White Orange 1 Ethern
4. OK Cancel Figure 9 2 Loopback configuration box 2 From the active ports click those required for loopback activation The selected port icons change color to light blue as in the following exam ple Loopback Help Loopback Configuration Configure Select Maximum Deselect All Select Maximum Deselect All Figure 9 3 Loopback configuration box with one Site A port selected 3 Click configure to choose a loopback mode Loopback Help Loopback Configuration Select Maximum Deselect All Select Maximum Deselect All None Reverse Line OK Cancel Figure 9 4 Loopback options 4 Click the required loopback mode Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 4 TDM Loopbacks Chapter 9 Loopback x Help Loopback Configuration Configure Select Maximum Deselect All Select Maximum Deselect All B 1 3 1 Figure 9 5 Loopback defined 5 Click OK to activate the selected loopback s This activates selected loopback s The corresponding service port icon in the main menu changes color and appearance to indicate an active loopback Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x g 2 E Ls Link Configuration Link Installation Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log Off gt Link TPSF_BTT Link ID EBG 29561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active IP Address 192 168 2
5. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when configuring the radio in the United States or where FCC rules apply the Tx power is set according to the values for which the product is certified The use of Tx Warning power values other than those for which the product is certified is expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47 CFR part 15 204 Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities Failure to do so may void the product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and Caution financial liabilities Resellers or distributors of this equipment are not liable for injury damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 iii Where Outdoor units are configurable by software to Tx power values other than those for which the product is certified it is the responsibility of the Warning Professional Installer to restrict the Tx power to the certified limits This product was tested with special accessories indoor unit IDU or PoE FTP CAT 5e shielded cable with sealing gasket 12 AWG grounding cable Warning Which must be used with the unit to insure compliance Indoor Units comply with part
6. System Air Interface 22 Hub Site Sync ODU Mode Bridge B Management Inventory Bridge Configuration IDU Aging Time sec R Security Ethemet Ports Configuration Date amp Time ooo Radio Link Failure Action Advanced ODU 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Dete No sk Ethernet TDM Services LAN 2 2 External Alarms LAN 1 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Detect v No Action Disconnected Auto Detect No Action 2 Operations Information Rate Maximum Kbps Best Effort Best Effort 32768 Figure 8 15 Ethernet Information Rate Throughput selection 4 Choose Other to define the throughput with 1 Kbps resolution 5 Choose Best Effort for the highest information rate possible for the link conditions and settings 6 Click Apply to save the changes TDM MHS Status Here you can see the TDM MHS status There is nothing to set Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 17 Setting External Alarm Inputs Chapter 8 4 Site Configuration A File Actions Help tel 2 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off System TDM Services Q Air Interface po eE Installation Mode 2 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory R Security Date amp Time Le Advanced Ethernet Mode TDM Services 2X External Alarms I Operations OK Cancel Figure 8 16 TDM MHS status Setting External Alarm Inputs The IDU C has four external alarm inputs and four external al
7. mngPortDisconnectedAlarm 111 major Indicates the management port status changed to disconnected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Management port status changed to disconnected externalAlarminPort3Alarm 112 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port 3 Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 3 lt User Text gt Alarm externalAlarmInPort4Alarm 113 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port 4 Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 4 lt User Text gt Alarm swVersionsMismatchFullCompatibilityAlarm 114 warning The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch with full link functionality Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software versions mismatch full link functionality Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 20 Trap Parameters Table Q 3 MIB Traps Sheet 3 of 4 Appendix Q Name Severity Description swVersionsMismatchRestrictedCompatibilityAlarm 115 minor The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch with restricted link functionality Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software versions mismatch restricted link functionality swVersionsMismatchSoftwareUpgrad
8. It can take up to 8 minutes for the NTP to synchronize the ODU date and time Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 12 Setting the Date and Time Chapter 8 gt To set the date and time 1 Determine the IP address of the NTP server to be used 2 Test it for connectivity using the command Windows XP for example w32tm stripchart computer 216 218 192 202 You should get a continuous response of times each a few seconds apart 3 Choose a site to configure The Configuration dialog box opens 4 Choose Date amp Time i Site Configuration File Actions Help ki Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off j Installation Mode System Date amp Time Q Air Interface NTP Server Bd 2 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security Offset Minutes E 00 00 HH mm Le Advanced ak Ethernet 2 TDM Services XX External Alarms Date amp Time 03 09 2005 21 58 13 I Operations Figure 8 10 Date and Time Configuration 5 If entering an IP address for the NTP Server click Clear and then enter the new address 6 Set your site Offset value in minutes ahead or behind GMT1 7 To manually set the date and time click Change and edit the new values Change Date amp Time Site A Date amp Time 709 205 01 5551 C Use Managing Computer Time Figure 8 11 Change Date and Time If you used an NTP Server you will see a window like this 1 Greenwich Mean
9. Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 D 2 The procedure Appendix D Link Manager 255 255 255 255 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help p 4 nfiguratiar 1 stallatio Site Location sitez Configuration Get Diagnostics fix gt Link Link Link ID p Radio Interface Services None Frequency GHz 5 820 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Location Site1 Rate Mbps Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Status Transmitting Ethernet Throughput Mbps Site Location IP Address 10 0 0 120 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Transmitting on Channel 5 820 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 12 02 2009 10 25 46 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in Internal 000002 12 02 2009 10 25 47 Connected to Location Internal 2 Connection Available Connection Mode Local IP Address 255 255 255 255 Figure D 2 Opening Link Manager window prior to installation 8 Click the un grayed Site Location button The following dialog window appears tS Site Configuration A File Actions Help ti 3 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off i Installation Mode System Q Air Interface 2 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory ObjectlD 11 36 1 4 1 4458 20 2 1 2 Security Date amp Time Here Le Advanced ak Ethernet Contact
10. 0 Secondary Disabled Service has been evaluated Click Next to continue IDU B Product 7 C 04 B000 7 C 04 BOOO HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Evaluation Figure 5 14 Choosing Hot Standby Mode 2 Click the radio button to make this link primary or secondary Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 12 Installation Chapter 5 Setting the TDM Jitter Buffer gt To set the TDM Jitter Buffer size 1 Click the TDM Jitter Buffer tab The following dialog appears Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby 4 B Size ms 4 5 3 Size ms 45 A Warning Changing TDM Jitter Buffer size wil affect the TOM delay IDU B Product 7 C 04 B000 7 C 04 BOOO HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 5 15 TDM Jitter Buffer Configuration E e The receiver jitter buffer for each site can be enlarged thereby increasing system resistance to interference the Note larger the jitter buffer the longer the interference period that the system will overcome without TDM errors e You can also decrease the jitter buffer to decrease the sys tem delay e The jitter buffer can be configured between 2 0 and 16 0 ms e After setting the new
11. 4 9 FIGURE 5 1 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD unarnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnvnnnannnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenen 5 3 FIGURE 5 2 INSTALLATION WIZARD SYSTEM DIALOG BOX cssesecsecseceeeeeeeeeseueeeeeeeeees 5 4 FIGURE 5 3 CHANGE LINK PASSWORD DIALOG BOX cceeseeseceseuuaueuseuseeaueuseusueaueavauseueess 5 5 FIGURE 5 4 LOST OR FORGOTTEN LINK PASSWORD RECOVERY ssessecessesaueuseuseeaveusauseenass 5 5 FIGURE 5 5 CHANNEL SETTINGS AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION eceseeseeseeaveusauseeness 5 6 FIGURE 5 6 CHANNEL SETTINGS SHOWING AVAILABLE INSTALLATION RATES sesesseeeeeeees 5 7 FIGURE 5 7 CHANNEL SETTINGS SHOWING AVAILABLE CHANNEL BANDWIDTHS ss 5 7 FIGURE 5 8 HSS SETTINGS nannunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen 5 8 FIGURE 5 9 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG avuvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn 5 9 FIGURE 5 10 TDM SERVICE PORT SELECTION uuvannnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 5 10 FIGURE 5 11 TDM SERVICE PORT SELECTION SEVEN SERVICES SELECTED s esseceseesavens 5 10 FIGURE 5 12 SERVICES AND RATES SERVICES CHOSEN iuarnnvnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannene 5 11 FIGURE 5 13 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG AVAILABLE RATES csesseseesesaueaveuseueusevaueas 5 11 FIGURE 5 14 CHOOSING HOT STANDBY MODE i anannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 5 12 FIGURE 5 15 TDM JITTER BUFFER CONFIGURATION csceseeseceucevaueuveusueaueavauseususevaeas 5 13 FIGURE 5 16
12. Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources disappeared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS multiple sync pulse sources disappeared hssSyncToProperSourceAchievedClear 219 normal Indicates that synchronization to a proper Sync source was achieved Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS sync pulse Up hssSyncPulseDisappearedClear 220 normal Indicates that HSS additional sync pulse disappeared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS additional sync pulse was disappeared tdmBackupClear 221 normal Indicates that the TDM main link was activated Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM main link was activated linkLockAuthorizedRemoteODU 222 normal Indicates that the remote ODU is authorized Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Authorized remote ODU connection accepted linkLockAuthorizedODU 223 normal Indicates that the ODU is authorized Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Authorized ODU connection permitted linkAuthenticationDisabled 224 normal Indicates that the Link Lock is disabled Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Link Authentication has been disabled hotStandbyClear 225 normal Indicates that the Primary Link
13. Link Link Location 22 Link ID Setup 2 Radio Interface RSS dem Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 490 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Ethernet Service Site 2 2 IP Address 10 105 2 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 21 Error Blocks Ih Site 2 4 IP Address 10 105 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 11 y 5 490 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000001 3 30 2009 10 21 36 AM Connected to 2 2 Internal 000002 3 30 2009 10 27 34 AM Compatible IDUs detected ODU 000003 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened ODU 000004 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm ODU 000005 3 30 2009 10 31 37 AM Compatible IDUs detected ODU 000006 3 30 2009 10 33 03 AM Compatible IDUs detected 2 2 lt S Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 2 2 WBB Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure K 13 Secondary Link operating after the switch back to Primary System Operation description e TDM services are carried by the primary link Normal operation e The secondary link equipment and air interface is operating but not carrying user traffic e TDM ports on the secondary IDUs are tri state e Switching to secondary will occur in the following cases Loss of the primary air interface due to sync loss e Loss of
14. No te The Events Log The Events Log records system failures loss of synchronization loss of sig nal compatibility problems and other fault conditions and events The foregoing event types include events from all links for which this managing computer has been defined as the traps address Only events from GE MDS equipment will be shown Alarms traps are displayed in the Events Log in the lower panel of the main window The Events Log may be saved as a text file The Events Log includes the following fields gt gt Sequential number ID Date and time stamp gt Message gt Trap source IP address of the ODU that initiated alarm For complete information about traps and alarms see Appendix M Table M 3 The events are displayed in the Events Log in the lower right hand panel of the Link Manager main window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 13 The Events Log Link Manager Chapter 9 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help he x Link Configuration Link Inst gt Link TPSF_BTT Link ID EBG 29561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 S Connection Available Connection Mode Network e B Get D
15. RSL 2 dBm TSL dBm BBER Ethemet Interface Capacity Mbps Traffic Mbps Figure 9 14 Threshold configuration dialog box RSL Thresholds Two RSL Thresholds can be defined They are used as an indicator of prob lems in the radio channel You can check the RSS from the Link Budget Cal culator results during installation Values of 5dB and 8dB from the current RSS are typical TSL THreshold A counter is maintained of the number of second intervals during which Tx power exceeds this threshold BBER Threshold The Background Block Error Ratio is measured as a percentage The thresh old can be set from 0 1 up to 50 For links with Ethernet only service 8 threshold is recommended If there are no problems during the interval then for that threshold the recom mended BBER value should be 0 Since the system provides a lossless Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 12 Events Alarms and Traps Chapter 9 Ethernet service there is throughput degradation in case of interference The degradation is proportional to the BBER Ethernet Thresholds Capacity This is used as a basis for checking adherence to a Service Level Agree ment It is the number of seconds count that the link capacity falls bellow the threshold Ethernet Thresholds Traffic The number of seconds count that received traffic exceeded this threshold It can be used to measure traffic peaks Events Alarms and Traps S
16. 1 4 E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 11 Frequency 5 2 Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000028 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM Compatible IDUs detected 000029 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM Ethernet Service has been opened 000030 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened 000031 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm lt M gt S Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 1 2 Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure K 10 Primary link after the switch over to secondary link After a few seconds the display moves to No Link display with TDM ports grayed out Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 13 Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link Appendix K Link Manager 10 105 2 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help E x amp 2 Es Link Configuration Link Installation Site 2 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log Off Link Link Location 2 2 24 Link ID Setup 2 Services 2xE1 Ethernet 5 2 WSS esol CC mm Frequency GHz 5 490 S RIE 29 Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Ethernet Throughput Mbps Site 2 2 IP Address 10 105 2 2 TDM Service Secondary Link Active Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 gt Estimated Time Betw
17. A Radio Interface ervices None i Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 gate Mbps re Site Location Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate Tx Rate IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Events Log Number 000001 000002 000003 Transmitting on Channel 5 280 GHz Trap Source IP Address Internal Internal Internal Date amp Time Message 16 03 2009 11 25 22 Location Site will be reset 16 03 2009 11 25 28 Device unreachable 16 03 2009 11 26 05 Connected to Location 2 Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 1 101 Figure E 6 Main Window after band change new band circled If you carry out this operation on a link the band is effective on both sites and you are placed in installation mode Changing Band for DFS Changing to a DFS band is similar to the foregoing procedure As soon as you establish a link using a DFS band you are offered Configura tion only in the main menu Installation mode is disabled 10 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Appendix F Software Upgrade What is the Software Upgrade Utility The Link Manager provides a Software Upgrade Utility SWU to upgrade the software firmware of installed ODUs in a network The update files
18. I Grounding Lug Use the lug supplied J Rack mounting holes K Detachable Rack mounting brackets L 0 4 8 or 16 E1 T1 Ports See Table K 4 M Standby Port Hot Standby ready HSB cable socket see Table K 5 The Indicator LEDs Item A in Table 3 1 above are shown in more detail below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 11 Mounting the IDU C Chapter 3 Figure 3 16 IDU E R Front Panel LEDs The purpose of the LEDs is shown in Table 3 2 below Table 3 2 IDU C Front Panel LEDs Green IDU operational IDU Blinking Green During power up only Red Failure ODU Green ODU to IDU communication link is operating Red ODU to IDU communication link is disrupted Green Wireless link is synchronized AIR I F Orange During installation mode only Red Wireless link lost synchronization Green E1 or T1 line is synchronized Orange Alarm detected at the Site B interface SVC Orange Local or Remote loopback Red Alarm detected at the Site A interface off Ethernet only IDU or E1 T1 not configured HSS See supplementary Table 3 3 following Hot Standby Mode Link State Green Primary Active STBY Blinking Green Secondary Not active Red Primary Not active Orange Secondary Active off off HSM not activated Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 12 Connecting power to the IDU Chapter 3 Table 3 3 IDU C Front Panel LEDs for HSS Green This ODU is HSS master generating signal and HSS Sync is OK
19. Piinking This ODU is a HSS client and in Sync Green Red HSS not operational due to improper signal detection This ODU is not transmitting HSS is operational One of the following conditions apply e This ODU is a master that is generating signals and detecting signals e This ODU is a master that is generating signals but detected improper signals Orange e This ODU is a client Continue Tx but is not detecting signals This ODU is a client Disable Tx and is detecting signals from multiple sources All orange cases transmit HSS is not activated off HSS is not supported Disconnection between ODU and IDU gt To mount an IDU C 1 Attach the rack mounting brackets K to the IDU 2 Bolt the IDU into an empty slot in the rack ensuring that it sits securely 3 Ground the IDU to the rack using grounding lug I The IDU should be left permanently grounded E Instead of using the rack mounting brackets the IDU may be rail mounted i using the four screw holes on each of its sides Note Connecting power to the IDU The IDU C has redundant power connection circuits items G and H in Figure 3 13 above An enlarged schematic of the power connectors is shown in below 20 60VDC 2 5A PRIMARY SECONDARY sale amp Figure 3 17 IDU C Power connectors Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 13 Connecting the ODU to the IDU Chapter 3 The connectors are 3 pin in line female w
20. Read Only Read Wwrite Figure 4 4 Extended log on window At the User Type field click the list button IP Address Password Operator User Type Community Read Only Read write Figure 4 5 Log on window exposing the user types Operator Operator Installer Observer There are three user types Chapter 4 e An Observer has read only access to the link An Observer can monitor the link generate reports but may not change any link parameters e An Operator can install and configure the link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 The Link Manager log on Concept Chapter 4 e An Installer can in addition to functioning as an Operator also change the operating band The latter function has legal ramifica tions requiring familiarity with local regulations The following table summarizes these options Table 4 2 User types default passwords and function Observer admin Monitoring Read Only public Operator admin maa lation Read Write netman configuration Operator plus set hard Read Write netman Installer wireless The Network Manager should change the default passwords as soon as pos sible gt Continuing the log on procedure 5 Type an IP address for the ODU if you connect through a LAN or click Local Connection if you are connected directly to the IDU port e If you log on u
21. Repeat for all ODUs that are to be collocated at the hub site The next ODU to be connected is inserted to SYNC 2 followed by SYNC 3 and so on In the event of an HSS installation fault the ODU will sound a beep pattern according to the following chart which may also be seen on the ODU product label BUZZER SIGNAL BEST SOFAR HEN INCREASED ENE SAME E DECREASED NO ANTENNA ALIGNMENT ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout Table H 1 ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout White Green 1 1 Green 2 2 White Orange 3 3 Orange 6 6 Blue 4 4 White Blue 5 5 White Brown 7 7 Brown 8 8 Radio Frame Pattern Table Under HSS the TDD mechanism of the collocated radios transmits at the same time and receives at the same time The cycle duration of transmit and receive is called Radio Frame Pattern RFP and with Wireless Mux it is always 1250 milliseconds Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 H 4 Wireless Mux Considerations Appendix H Tx Tx Tx Tx ODU 1 Rx Rx Rx Rx l Tx Tx Tx Tx ODU 2 Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx i Tx Tx ODU 3 Rx Rx Rx Rx I I RFP i e gt I l Figure H 5 Radio Frame Pattern Five RFP types A to E are available The RFP is selected depending on the type of the radio products services and channel bandwidth used by the complete system e RFP type E should be used if and only if Wireless Mux links are part of 3 the HSS installation Note e The RFP
22. Status Link Active IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 a Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Location Radio Interface RSS dam Ethernet Service Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate Tx Rate TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks E1 Ports Frequency 5 780 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time IP Address Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Figure 1 24 Link Manager window Accessories 8 Encrypted Link GE MDS provides a variety of accessories to support the Wireless Link system PoE devices AC Power Adaptors External Lightning Protection Units Cables to connect the various system elements Release 1 9 1 14 Documentation set supplied with Chapter 1 Grounding cables Documentation set supplied with The technical documentation supplied with a Wireless Link is located on the product CD It includes the following items A Quick Installation Guide for experienced installers also hardcopy A full User Manual the document which you are reading A Help file accessible from the Link Manager Link Budget Calculator How to Use this Manual This User Manual is divided into three functionally distinct sections reflecting the activities required to set up a Wireless Link The division is shown in
23. TSL was above the specified threshold BBER Threshold The number of seconds in which the Background Block Error Ratio BBER exceeded the specified threshold Additional Ethernet Interface PM Data Received Bytes The number of Megabytes received at the specified port within the interval Transmitted Bytes The number of Megabytes transmitted at the specified port within the interval Throughput threshold Seconds count when throughput fell below the threshold Traffic threshold Seconds count when actual traffic exceeded the threshold TDM interface Active seconds The number of seconds that the configured TDM services are active Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 11 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar You can use the toolbar to perform the actions described in the following table Table 9 4 Action of the toolbar buttons Get Data Gather current performance monitoring data Save Save current performance monitoring data to a file Clear Clear current performance monitoring data Thresholds Set Thresholds Selection Pane Toggle on off left panel Close Closes the Performance Monitoring window Setting Air Interface Thresholds Use the Thresholds button on the Monitoring Performance Report toolbar to set the Air Interface Thresholds i Threshold Configuration A Thresholds Air Interface RSL 1 dBm
24. gt To reinstall the link 1 Choose a site The Configuration dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 7 The Link Budget Calculator Chapter 9 2 In the Configuration dialog box click the Install Mode button A message box asking if you want to enter install mode appears 3 Click Yes to continue The system enters Install mode and the alignment tone becomes audi ble 4 Realign the ODUs and start the Installation wizard see 5 The Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is part of the Link Manager software and is found in the Help menu This useful utility enables you to calculate the expected performance of the wireless link and the possible configurations for a specific link range including antenna size cable loss and climate condi tions For full details see Appendix B Performance Monitoring Wireless Link Performance Monitoring constantly monitors traffic over the radio link and collects statistics data for the air interface TDM and Ethernet ports It does so continuously even when the Link Manager is not con nected Two types of logs are recorded e Monitor Log that records statistics on traffic rate and radio signal strength e Events Log that records when the rates fall above or below a pre defined threshold See page 9 13 below Both the statistics Monitor log and events log can be saved as text files The Monitor Log The Monitor Log records performance statistics for p
25. lt gt port MNG LAN1 LAN2 gt lt mode AUTO 10H 10F 100H 100F DIS ABLE gt Set the mode and speed of each Ethernet port reboot Resets both the IDU and the ODU The user is warned that the command will reset the ODU A new Telnet session to the ODU may be opened after the reset is complete Watch the IDU LEDs help Displays the available commands Figure 8 21 below shows the available Telnet commands using the help command Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 23 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 8 admin 192 168 2 101 gt Type help for help admin 192 168 2 101 gt help display inventory display management display link display ethernet display tdm display ntp display PM lt interface AIRRMNGLAN1 LAN2 TDM1 TDM2 TDM3 TDM4 gt lt interval current day month gt set ip lt ipaddr gt lt subnetMask gt lt gateway gt set trap lt index 1 10 gt lt ipaddr gt lt port 1 65535 gt set readpw lt writePasswd gt lt newPasswd gt set writepw lt writePasswd gt lt newPasswd gt set trappw lt writePasswd gt lt newPasswd gt set buzzer lt mode 0 OFF 1 ON gt set tpe lt power Value between minimal TX power and maximal TX power gt set bridge lt mode 0 Bridging OFF 1 Bridging ON gt set name lt new name gt set location lt new location gt set contact lt new contact gt set ethernet lt port MNGLANI LAN2 gt lt mode AUTO 10H 10F 100H 100F DISABLE gt reboot help Command help fin
26. 10 0 0 125 4 Click OK 5 At the desktop re label the new icon to something recognizable like Link Manager Secondary You may now use the new icon to run a second copy of the Link Manager It will run against the IP address you nominated bypassing the log on pro cess Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 12 Switching Logic Appendix K Switching Logic Switching from Primary Link to Secondary Link Switching from primary link to secondary link will occur following e Loss of the primary air interface due to sync loss e Loss of the primary air interface due to failure of the receiver to acquire expected E1 T1 data during a period of 24ms e The Primary equipment either ODU or IDU local or remote is pow ered off Following the switch from the primary to the secondary link the primary and secondary link Manager main windows should look like this Link Manager 10 105 1 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help S x v 9 e a Link Configuration ik Installatior Site 1 2 Site 1 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Link Link Link ID Setup 1 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service Status Link Active Location Radio Interface Ethernet Throughput Mbps _ Site 1 2 IP Address 10 105 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 21 Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks JA Site
27. 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 These devices may not cause harmful interference 2 These devices must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Canadian Emission Requirements for Indoor Units This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada China MII Operation of the equipment is only allowed under China MII 5 8GHz band regulation configuration with EIRP limited to 33 dBm 2 Watt India WPC Operation of the equipment is only allowed under India WPC GSR 38 for 5 8GHz band regulation configuration Unregulated In countries where the radio is not regulated the equipment can be operated in any regulation configuration best results will be obtained using Universal regulation configuration Safety Practices Applicable requirements of National Electrical Code NEC NFPA 70 and the National Electrical Safety Code ANSI IEEE C2 must be considered during installation NOTES 1 A Primary Protector is not required to protect the exposed wiring as long as the exposed wiring length is limited to less than or equal to 140 feet and instructions are provided to avoid exposure of wiring to accidental contact with lightning and power conductors in accordance with NEC Sections 725 54 c and 800 30 In all other cases an appropriate Listed
28. 3 Turn on the CW transmit signal from site A from the Wireless Link NMS 4 At site B tune the SA to the frequency transmitted 5 Increase the SA sensitivity according to the expected receive signal Aligning the antennas E When one antenna is moved the opposite site is passive Move the antennas very slowly Note gt To align the antennas 1 Slowly move the site B antenna azimuth axis the elevation axis should be locked until you see the best signal on the SA Lock the azimuth axis 2 Slowly move the site A antenna azimuth axis the elevation axis should be locked until you see the best signal on the SA 3 Lock the azimuth axis 4 Slowly move the site B antenna elevation axis the azimuth axis should be locked until you see the best signal on the SA Lock the elevation axis 5 Slowly move the site antenna elevation axis the azimuth axis should be locked until you see the best signal on the SA Lock the elevation axis 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the reading on the SA is equal or as close as possible to the calculated receive signal for Rx Power Level see Expected Signal Level for AIND radios on page G 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 G 2 Aligning the antennas Appendix G 7 When the SA reads the expected receive signal the antennas are aligned and there is an indication of a good link between the sites 8 Tighten the antenna azimuth axis and elevation axis 9 Stop the CW f
29. 9 8 RE Subpart C and IC RSS 210 FCC 5 4 5 490 5 705 PEC VER FARE Subpart E 5 490 5 580 IC 5 4 IC RSS 210 5 670 5 705 FCC 47CFR Part 15 FCC IC 5 3 5 270 5 330 Subpart E and IC RSS 210 FCC 47CFR Part 90 FCC IC 4 9 4 950 4 980 Subpart Y and IC RSS 111 FCC 47CFR Part 15 FCC IC 2 4 2 412 2 462 Subpart C and IC RSS 210 FCC 2 5 2 49900 2 68725 FCC 47CFR Part 27 5 825 5 875 GSR 38 MII China 5 8 5 730 5 845 MII China ETSI 5 8 5 735 5 865 ETSI EN 302 502 ETSI 5 4 5 480 5 715 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI 5 3 5 160 5 340 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI 2 4 2 412 2 472 ETSI EN 300 328 Universal 5 9 5 730 5 950 Universal 5 4 5 490 5 710 N A Universal 5 3 5 140 5 345 Universal 2 3 2 4 2 302 2 397 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 N 1 Configuration Appendix N Channel Bandwidth 5MHz for Access all ther models 5MHz 10MHz and 20MHz 5MHz Resolution Radio Modulation OFDM BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM Adaptive Modulation amp Coding Supported Automatic Channel Selection Supported Duplex Technology TDD Error Correction FEC k 1 2 2 3 3 4 Rate Mbps 6 9 12 18 24 26 48 54 Modulation BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM FEC k 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 3 3 4 Max Tx Power dBm 23 20 16 Sensitivity dBm BER lt 10e 11 20MHz 87 84 1 80 79 73 66 62 Encryption AES 128 Configuration Architec
30. 9 Mb s BPSK 0 75 v 18 dem 4 16 dB dB dB 6 dB Expected Performance 48 Km v Good C 0 25 v 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only 144 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only 15 Meter 49 Feet Calculate Figure B 7 RFP Selection Guide You must select E for a Hub Site containing Wireless Mux links 98 666 availability downtime 7012 min year 4 Enter the radio details Note that Rate is chosen from a drop down list Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 8 Running the Link Budget Calculator WBB B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Appendix B WBB Link Budget RIGES FCC INT _M 20 MHz M Auto vB 5 8 GHz 9 Mbis BPSK 0 75 VI 9 Mbis BPSK 0 75 12 Mb s QPSK 0 5 18 Mb s QPSK 0 75 24 Mb s 18 QAM 0 5 26 N QAM 0 75 48 Mois 84 QAM 0 68 de le dB 38 dBm 6 3 Watt 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles 46 Km 28 6 Miles Expected Performance 8 km M Goos c 025 ME 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only M 98 666 availability downtime 7012 min vear 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Figure B 8 Rate selector S o If you choose Adaptive Rate then the Rate list is unavai
31. After a few moments the Link Manager main window appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 E 2 The procedure Appendix E Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer DER File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x p Site Location figuration Get Diagnostics Location Site1 Site2 Radio Interface RSS dem Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate Tx Rate IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Transmitting on Channel 5 820 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Trap Source IP Address 2 Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 1 101 Figure E 2 Opening Link Manager window prior to band change default circled 7 Click Tools Change Band The following window appears amp Change Band Select a band from the list below Band Description Installation Frequency GHz 5 150 5 335 GHz Universal 5 280 5 475 5 720 GHz Universal 5 580 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC default 5 780 5 835 5 865 GHz WPC 5 840 5 740 5 940 GHz Universal 5 780 The fable contains common data from the and B sies Figure E 3 Change Band dialog The bands appearing in Figure E 3 are product dependent To see which 3 bands are available for your product check your product Inventory see Note Figure 8 7 and then co
32. Chapter 7 Table 7 1 Link Configuration Wizard 1 Wizard welcome System parameters e Link ID Site details 3 Channel settings ACS Configuration 4 uss settings Services Types 5 Adaptive or fixed Jitter Buffer MHS a 6 Set TDM Clock Parameters 7 Wizard summary and completion Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 2 Configuration Chapter 7 Configuration Since configuration functionality is included in the installation we will briefly review the main steps and for most part offer references to the correspond ing installation step Step 1 Start the Wizard In the tool bar of the Link Manager main window click the Link Configu ration button The Link Configuration button is only accessible on a fully installed link as set out in 5 The Configuration Wizard opens Link Configuration Wizard Welcome to the Link Configuration Wizard W This wizard is used for performing Link configuration updates After Changes made in Frequency field the Link will be resynchronized Note that all changes made to the Link should be reflected in Link Quality monitor All the fields are mandatory Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 7 1 Link Configuration Wizard Click Next to proceed with the configuration procedure Step 2 System Parameters The System dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 3 Configuration Link Confi
33. Click Add Site to add additional sites for upgrade En on de Add Site Clear all Upgrade Pa s _ Add Single Site TA Add from File 09 Figure F 2 Add site options Click Add Single Site for one site only e Add Site for Software Upgrade IP Address Read Only Community Read Write Community Figure F 3 Adding a single site for upgrade Enter the IP address of the site the Community strings Default public and netman respectively and then click OK The site will appear in the Software Upgrade list box For example if we add the site at IP address 192 168 1 101 the SWU main window of Figure F 1 looks like this Software Upgrade Tool File Actions Help gt Moro XX Ge lal y Start Upgrade Stop porade AddSite Clear all Upgrade Package Save Configuration Close Software Upgrade details Available Release Description Backup device software Perform Reset to each device after successful upgrade Software Upgrade Link Name IP Address Site Name 192 168 2 101 A 1 9 00 b1715 Jun 7 2009 192 168 2 102 B 1 9 00 b1715 Jun 7 2009 F_BTT Direct connection 192 168 1 101 A 2 3 00_b2325_Jun 22 2009 Figure F 4 Single site added for upgrade The list can be cleared using the Clear All button Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 F 2 Upgrading an Installed Link Appendix F As an alternative to adding sites o
34. Compass optional Stage 3 RF Survey e Spectrum Analyzer with Max Hold function and screen capture facil ity that can store multiple images for documentation purposes e RF accessories connectors and cables e Communication devices for example cellular phones or a set of walkie talkies Stage 1 Preliminary Survey A preliminary survey is necessary before visiting potential installation sites As much detail as possible should be obtained about the two designated ODU installation sites and the area between them gt To perform a preliminary survey 1 Mark the two designated installation sites on a topographic map of the area 2 Measure the distance between the sites check that it is within the speci fied range of the equipment 3 On the urban map check for developed areas situated between the two installation sites Pay attention to these areas when performing the phys ical site survey there may be tall buildings RF towers or transmitters which could cause interference to the link 4 Check the area between the two sites for obstructions such as e High ground hills or mountains e Lakes or large bodies of water Water has a reflection effect on RF signals like a building This type of reflection causes the received amplitude to be reduced As a rule of thumb the presence of a large body of water between the link sites may double the required antenna height 5 Determine and record the compass bearings betw
35. Configuration Close Software Upgrade details Available Release Description ti 192 168 2 101 1 9 00_b1715_Jun 7 2009 1 192 168 2 102 1 9 00 b1715 Jun 7 2009 H Figure F 5 Software upgrade in progress Note the stop button 7 Click Close to exit Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 F 3 Upgrading an Installed Link Appendix F If one or both sites fail to update a warning notice will be displayed If one site of a link updates but the other fails you should correct the problem and update the second site as soon as possible If you do not Caution following the next reset of the updated site you could experience a link software mismatch which may affect service See page 9 3 for details Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 F 4 Appendix G AIND Alignment Use this procedure when installing the Al indoor system Wireless Link ANID or manually aligning two Wireless Link units To achieve the best results use the Llink Budget Calculator from the Wire less Link installation and then align the antennas so that they exactly face each other To achieve the best performance the line of sight must be as clear as possi ble with no obstructions between the two sites Prior to attempting alignment install the hardware and software in accor dance with this User Manual The figure below shows the link setup At least two people are needed to perform the alignment procedures Onc
36. Connect the ODU IDU cable using the RJ 45 jack Connect one cable between the ODU and the suppressor using an RJ 45 jack ua AA W N 6 Connect the suppressor s ground stud to a grounding point Use the appropriate wire gauge and type keeping the wire as short as possible less than 1m 3 between the stud and the site grounding point Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 C 5 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix C 7 Replace the cover m There may also be regulatory requirements to cross bond the ODU IDU CAT BS 5e cable at regular intervals up the mast This may be as frequent as every Note 10 meters 33 feet A second Surge Arrestor Unit should be mounted at the building entry point and must be grounded as shown in Figure C 3 above gt To mount the lightning protection at the building entry point 1 Mount the device outside the building located as near as possible to the entrance of the CAT 5e ODU IDU cable Mount the unit so that the cable connectors are at the bottom to prevent water from penetrating with the strain reliefs facing the ground Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes Connect the ODU IDU cable using the RJ 45 jack Connect one cable between the IDU and the suppressor using an RJ 45 jack ua AA U N 6 Connect the suppressor s ground stud to a grounding point Use the app
37. DisplayString RO Alarm display text same as the text in the sent trap wbbOduAgnLastEventsNumber 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 1 Integer RO This counter indicates the size of the wbbOduAgnLastEventsTable wbbOduAgnLastEventsTable N A This table includes the last events When a trap is sent wbbOduAgnLastEventsEntry N A Entry containing the details of last traps INDEX wbbOduAgnLastEventsindex wbbOduAgnLastEventsindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 1 Integer RO The index of the table wbbOduAgnLastEventsSeverity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 2 Integer RO Current Trap severity Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 14 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 11 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbbOduAgnLastEventsifindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 3 Integer RO Interface Index where the event occurred Traps that are not associated with a specific interface will have the following value 65535 wbbOduAgnLastEventsTimeT 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 4 Integer RO Timestamp of this trap This number is in seconds from Midnight January 1st wbbOduAgnLastEventsText 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 5 DisplayString RO Trap display text same as the text in the sent trap wbblduAdmProductType 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 1 DisplayString RO IDU configuration desc
38. Eth mode speed amp duplex externalAlarminPort3Clear 212 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port 3 is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 3 lt User Text gt Alarm Cleared externalAlarmInPort4Clear 213 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port 4 is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 4 lt User Text gt Alarm Cleared swVersionsMatchFullCompatibilityClear 214 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software Versions compatible swVersionsMatchRestrictedCompatibilityClear 215 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and link functionality is not restricted Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software Versions compatible swVersionsMatchSoftwareUpgradeRequiredClear 216 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and SW upgrade is successful Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software Versions compatible swVersionsCompatibleClear 217 normal The trap is sent if SW versions compatibleContains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software Versions compatible hssMultipleSourcesDisappearedClear 218 normal
39. Figure 8 4 Management Addresses Site Configuration dialog box 4 Choose Management 5 Enter the IP address of the ODU in the IP Address field If performing configuration from the Link Manager the IP address is that Noe entered from the Login window ote 6 Enter the Subnet Mask 7 Enter the Default Gateway 8 Enter the Trap Destination This could be the IP address of the managing computer The events log will be stored at this address 9 Click Apply to save the changes Configuring VLAN Settings VLAN Management enables separation of user traffic from management traffic whenever such separation is required It is recommended that both sides of the link be configured with different VLAN IDs for management traf Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 5 Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 8 fic This reduces your chances of accidentally locking yourself out of the link gt To enable VLAN management 1 Click Configuration from the main menu 2 Choose a site to configure If you are configuring both sites choose site B first to avoid locking yourself out 3 Choose Management 4 Open the VLAN tab 5 Check the Enabled box 6 Enter a VLAN ID Its value should be between 1 and 4094 After entering the VLAN ID only packets with the specified VLAN ID are processed for management purposes by the ODU This includes all the protocols supported by the ODU ICMP SNMP TELNET and NTP The V
40. Frequency MHz A1 2509 v A For Activation select Frequency parameters and move fo Installation Mode Cancel Apply Figure I 2 BRS Air Interface dialog box 4 Set the appropriate Frequency Band Plan and Bandwidth 5 Select the required frequency band and click Apply 6 Click Installation Mode 7 Repeat for the remote ODU Link Installation Wizard BRS Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in a Link re synchronization C Configuration IV BRS Notation BandPlan Pre Transition Post Transition Bandwidth Quad Band Frequency MHz 42 43 B1 B2 2518 50 43 B1 B2 B3 2524 00 B1 B2 B3 C1 2529 50 B2 B3 C1 C2 2535 00 B3 C1 C2 C3 2540 50 C1 C2 C3 D1 2546 00 C3 D lt Back Next gt Cancel Monitor Link R Radio Interface EN RSS dem Quality 3 4 No Serv Ethernet Ethemet TDM No Serv Ethernet Ethernet TDM Figure I 3 BRS Channel Settings Pre Transition 8 Perform the remainder of the Installation procedure as defined in the Installation section Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 BRS Link Configuration Appendix I BRS Link Configuration The BRS link is reconfigured during the Link Installation or the Link Configu ration wizards or from the Air Interface screen Both sites in a BRS Link must be configured identically i BS Any changes to the frequency settings cause the link to re Note synchronize A short
41. Integer RO Maximum EIRP value as defined by regulation in 0 1 dBm resolution wbbOduAirAntennaGainConfigSupport 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 47 Integer RO Antenna Gain Configurability wbbOduAirAntennaT ype 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 48 Integer RW External Antenna Type Monopolar or Bipolar wbbOduAirRssBalance 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 49 Integer RO RSS balance Relation between RSS in radio 1 and RSS in radio 2 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 9 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 6 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbbOduAirTotalTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 50 Integer RO Total Transmit Power in dBm This is a nominal value While the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation wbbOduAirinstallFreqAndCBW 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 51 DisplayString RW Installation frequency wbbOduAirDFStype 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 52 Integer RO DFS regulation type wbbOduAirComboSubBandTable N A ODU Multi band Sub Bands Table wbbOduAirComboSubBandEntry N A ODU Multi band Sub Bands Table entry INDEX wbbOduAirComboSubBandindex wbbOduAirComboSubBandindex RO ODU Multi band sub bands table index wbbOduAirComboSubBandid RO Represents the Multi band sub band ID wbbOduAirComboSubBandDescription RO Multi band sub band description wbbOduAirComboSubBand
42. Jitter Buffer Default Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond wbblduTdmJitterBufferMinSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 15 Integer RO TDM Jitter Buffer Minimum Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond wbblduTdmyitterBufferMaxSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 16 Integer RO TDM Jitter Buffer Maximum Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond wbblduTdmyitterBufferSizeEval 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 17 Integer RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size for evaluation The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond wbblduTdmType 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 18 Integer RW TDM Type The value undefined is read only wbblduTdmTypeEval 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 19 Integer RW TDM Type for evaluation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 17 MIB Traps Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 14 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description wbblduTdmLineStatusStr 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 20 DisplayString RO Line status wbblduTdmHotStandbySupport 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 21 Integer RO Indicates if Hot Standby is supported wbblduTdmDesiredHotStandbyMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 22 Integer RW Desired Hot Standby Mode wbblduTdmHotStandbyOperationStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 23 Integer RO The Link Actual Status wbblduTdmBackupLinkConfiguration RW The current configuration of the backup link wbbGeneralTrapDescription 1 3 6 1 4
43. Link You should change it 3 Enter names for Site 1 and Site 2 The default names are both Location You should change them Throughout this manual we use A for Site 1 and B for Site 2 4 Optionally enter a new Link Password If the Link Password is incorrect a link is established but configuration cannot be performed and no services are available A new link password may be obtained from GE MDS Customer Support or use the alternative password supplied with the product The link password is peculiar to the link itself and should not be confused with the Link Manager log on password 5 Click Next The default link with a rate of 6 5 Mbps is evaluated 5 4 Installation Chapter 5 The Channel Setting dialog box appears Proceed to Channel Settings below Changing the Link Password The default password is wireless bridge Optionally you can change the link password as explained here gt To change the link password 1 Click the Change button in the System dialog box The Change Link Password dialog box opens lin S Use the Hide characters check box for maximum security Note Change Link Password Enter current Link Password New Contirm Hide characters Figure 5 3 Change Link Password dialog box 2 Enter the current link password The default link password for a new ODU is wireless bridge If you have forgotten the Link Password click the Forgotten L
44. Link Installation Site 2 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Link Link Location Link ID Setup 2 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 490 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate RSS dem Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Site 2 2 IP Address 10 105 22 TOM Service Secondary Link Not Active Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Estimated Time Between Errors al ho so min hole a Trap Destination 10 105 2 21 i Site 2 4 E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 11 Frequency 5 490 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000001 3 30 2009 10 21 36 AM Connected to 2 2 Internal 000002 3 30 2009 10 27 34 AM Compatible IDUs detected ODU 000003 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened ODU 000004 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm ODU 000005 3 30 2009 10 31 37 AM Compatible IDUs detected ODU 000006 3 30 2009 10 33 03 AM Compatible IDUs detected 22 lt j 7 Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 2 2 Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure K Z The secondary link under normal operation To see what happens following a cut over from the primary link to the sec ondary link you need to have running two copies of the Link Manager one logged into the primary link and o
45. MIB Q 3 Technical data N 2 Telnet commands 8 22 Throughput display 6 6 Trap message 9 15 Technical Specifications Air Interface general N 1 Configuration N 1 EMC N 4 Environmental N 3 Ethernet Interface N 3 Management N 3 Mechanical N 3 Power N 3 Wireless Link User Manual Release1 9 8 12 typical installation 8 3 8 5 U 8 7 User equipment connecting N 1 N 2 8 21 8 22 9 2 O 2 3 7 5 6 O 1 O 1 O 1 O 1 Index 5 IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY GE MDS products are designed for long life and trouble free operation However this equipment as with all electronic equipment may have an occasional component failure The following information will assist you in the event that servicing becomes necessary TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE Technical assistance for GE MDS products is available from our Technical Support Department during business hours 8 00 A M 5 30 P M Eastern Time When calling please give the complete model number of the product along with a description of the trouble symptom s that you are experiencing In many cases problems can be resolved over the telephone without the need for returning the unit to the factory Please use one of the following means for product assistance Phone 585 241 5510 E Mail gemds techsupport ge com FAX 585 242 8369 Web www gemds com FACTORY SERVICE Component level repair of this equipment is not recommended in the field Many components are installed using surface mo
46. ODU IDU CAT5e cable Figure C 4 ODU Surge Suppressor and grounding Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 C 4 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix C The Transtector protection circuits shown in Figure C 5 below utilize sili con avalanche diode technology The unit consists of an outdoor rated NEMA 3R type enclosure with easy mounting flanges ground stud attach ment and easy wiring The ALPU POE features RJ 45 protection circuits for the ODU IDU data pairs pins 1 2 amp 3 6 and DC power pins 4 5 amp 6 7 with the pairs bonded The unit is designed to be wall mounted An optional set of bracket is avail able to allow a wide range of pole mount applications dedicated ground stud is provided inside the unit that must be bonded to the nearest ground ing system or Master Ground bar for proper surge protection The system wiring is installed with RJ 45 type connectors that can feed directly into the chassis without having to cut splice or route through awk ward strain relief holes Figure C 5 Transtector s Surge Suppressor gt To mount the lightning protection devices 1 Mount the device as close to the ODU as possible Mount the unit so that the cable connectors are at the bottom to prevent water from penetrat ing with the strain reliefs facing the ground Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes
47. Output 4 Normally Open 10 Output 4 Common 11 Output 4 Normally Closed 12 The figure below shows how to connect external input and output alarms e Use an external current limit resistor to limit the current at the output n relays to 1 Amp Such resistor is not required if the equipment con S amp S nected to the IDU supports current limiting to 1 Amp Note e The voltage of the input alarm must be within the range of 10 to 50 VDC Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 O 3 DC Power Terminals Appendix O Normally Open Out 1 Common Normally Closed Normally Open Out 2 Common Normally Closed IDU C Alarms Connector Normally Open Out 4 Common Normally Closed Alarms Concentration Positive GS Negative T _ 10 to 50 VDC Alarm Voltage Positive Negative 10 to 50 VDC Alarm Voltage Positive Legend _ 10 to 50 VDC Alarm Voltage mm Current Limit Resistor external Negative DC Power Source extemal Positive Negative 10 to 50 VDC Alarm Voltage Figure O 1 Example for connecting the alarm connector DC Power Terminals IDU C and BDU Table O 7 Terminal Block 3 pin 48VDC Right Chassis Center Left IDU E Table O 8 Terminal Block 2 pin 48VDC Right Left Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 O 4 Appendix P Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver IDU C SF
48. Parameters Sheet 1 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type Description wbbOduAdmProductType 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 1 DisplayString R ODU configuration description wbbOduAdmHwRev 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 2 DisplayString O O ssas0y Ri ODU Hardware Version wbbOduAdmSwRev 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 3 DisplayString RO ODU Software Version wbbOduAdmLinkName 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 4 DisplayString RW Link Name A change is effective immediately wbbOduAdmResetCmd 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 5 Integer RW Reset Command A set command with a value of 3 will cause a device reset The read value is always 0 wbbOduAdmAddres 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 6 IpAddress RW ODU IP address A change is effective after reset The parameter is kept for backward compatibility Using the alternative parameter wbbOduAdmlpParamsCnfg is recommended wbbOduAdmMask 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 7 IpAddress RW ODU Subnet Mask A change is effective after reset The parameter is kept for backward compatibility Using the alternative parameter wbbOduAdmlpParamsCnfg is recommended wbbOduAdmGateway 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 8 IpAddress RW ODU default gateway A change is effective after reset The parameter is kept for backward compatibility Using the alternative parameter wbbOduAdmlpParamsCnfg is
49. Primary Protector must be provided Refer to Articles 800 and 810 of the NEC for details 2 For protection of ODU against direct lightning strikes appropriate requirements of NFPA 780 should be considered in addition to NEC 3 For Canada appropriate requirements of the CEC 22 1 including Section 60 and additional requirements of CAN CSA B72 must be considered as applicable Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 iv Brief Table of Contents Part 1 Basic Installation Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Site Preparation Chapter 3 Hardware Installation Chapter 4 Getting Started with the Link Manager Chapter 5 Installing the Link Chapter 6 The Link Manager Main Window Chapter 7 Configuring the Link Chapter 8 Site Configuration Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics Part 2 Advanced Installation Appendix A Pole and Wall Installation Appendix B Link Budget Calculator Appendix C Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Appendix D Preloading an ODU with an IP Address Appendix E Changing the Factory Default Band Appendix F Software Upgrade Appendix G AIND Alignment Appendix H Hub Site Synchronization Appendix I BRS Installation Procedure Appendix J FCCIIC DFS Installation Procedure Appendix K Monitored Hot Standby Installation Procedure Appendix L Cascaded Links Appendix M Video Surveillance Part 3 Technical Information Appendix N Technical Specifications Appendix O Wiring Specifications Appendix P Small Form factor Pluggable Transcei
50. R 3 IDU E AL OUTPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION cccecseceseusueuseesevaveuseusevaveavens R 2 TABLE R 4 IDU E AL INPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION aunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne R 2 TABLE R 5 POE 8 OUTPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION avannavnnnnvnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne R 3 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Wireless Link Part 1 Basic Installation Broadband Wireless Transmission User Manual Release 1 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to Wireless Link GE MDS Intrepid family of wireless broadband products deliver carrier class performance at the most competitive price Wireless Link products pack legacy TDM and Ethernet services over the 2 3 2 7 GHz and 4 9 6 0 GHz spectrum bands and comply with worldwide standards and regulations including FCC and ETSI All of our carrier class Wireless Link products meet the stringent perfor mance and quality demands of cellular carriers and service providers Deliv ering high capacity connectivity of up to 48 Mbps at distances of up to 80 Km 50 miles the Wireless Link products offer an unmatched combination of robustness and reliability at an affordable price About Release 1 9 Release 1 9 of Wireless Link brings together incremental changes fixes and several new features added to the 1 7x and 1 8 releases Here are the major changes and additions HSS Interoperability between Wireless Link and Wireless Mux Site Synchronization is supp
51. Rate availability wbbOduAirDesiredRateldx 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 28 Integer RW Required Air Rate index 0 reserved for Adaptive Rate A change is effective immediately after Set operation to the master sidewhile the link is up wbbOduAirLinkDistance 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 29 Integer RO Link distance in meters A value of 1 indicates an illegal value and is also used when a link is not established wbbOduAirLinkWorkingMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 30 Integer RO Link working mode as a result of comparing versions of both sides of the link Possible modes are Unknown no link wbbOduAirMajorLinklfVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 31 Integer RO Major link interface version wbbOduAirMinorLinklfVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 32 Integer RO Minor link interface version wbbOduAirHssDesiredOpState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 1 Integer RW Required Hub Site Synchronization operating state wbbOduAirHssCurrentOpState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 2 Integer RO Current Hub Site Synchronization operating state Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 8 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 5 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description Q o 7 wbbOduAirHssSyncStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 3 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization sync status wbbOduAirHssExtPulseStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 4 Integer RO
52. Restore Refresh Buzzer Off i Installation Mode 2 Hub Site Sync Link ID B Management Inventory Security Date amp Time Advanced Ethernet E3 TDM Services Installation Frequency GHz TxPower Expected dBm Current dBm Installation Parameters OY External Alarms Channel Bandwidth MHz I Operations OK Cancel Figure 8 2 Air interface details The only thing you may change here is the expected Tx power If for exam ple you reduce it to 22 you are first offered a notification window like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 3 Hub Site Sync Chapter 8 O Tx Power Limits Tx Power Max Values Under the following Link rates the Tx Power limits are Rate Mbps Max Tx Power dBm 23 23 23 20 20 16 Less than the Expected Tx Power value Close After closing the window you are offered a cautionary notice Site Configuration p fou are about to change ODU parameters 7 This process may last several seconds and may affect link quality Do you wish to continue If you accept it the change is effected immediately Notice that each site can have a different Tx Power setting Changing the Tx Power will affect service quality The same considerations apply here as were noted in the Installation procedure on page 5 15 Caution Hub Site Sync Here you can view the HSS status Site Configuration A File Actions Help ti EE B
53. Settings ss 5 8 da cm a an ceci mice 5 8 Step 6 TOM Clock COMMON ON nu ste esse eanan 5 15 Step 7 Installation Summary and Exit sussemmmnsmmemensmisnnvvn 5 17 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 vii Chapter 6 The Link Manager Main Window One Manager for all Radio POTTS ia annees sde 6 1 The Main Window of the Link Manager sicnccnictstscnsncenscnerierncnimnaumuancucsawcvammuanns 6 1 The Link Manager Toolbar mcm misent 6 2 Main Henu PDO emcnnmnaademetmmaomnmamisabwom 6 3 Elements of the Link Manager Main WindOW ssssssssssssssssrrrsssrrnrnrnenrnnnnnnesrnnnns 6 4 Chapter 7 Configuring the Link VEVE som sait E Eiaa EEE AA used EEEa 7 1 HT UD ANNE EN EE 7 3 Step 1 Sal Wie Wizard sosnami E A 7 3 ea a EE 2 RE 7 3 Step 3 Channel Settings REE TE 7 4 Step 4 Hub Site Synchronization Settings masi 7 8 Siep TS aiita dan b k k bebe 7 8 Step 6 TOM Clock CON EON sicansnneaceacovannicscnsncredennaenadnnnnnnnenicenaaumeeentamnnan 7 9 Step 7 Configuration Summary and EME username 7 10 Chapter 8 Site Configuration RR EN 8 1 Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site rrnrrvauvvnrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnuvnnnrnnnnnuvnnnr 8 1 Functions onthe leftof the dialog BOX ssnin dinana 8 2 Functions at the top of the dialog box RL 8 2 viewing Systemi Detal AR RP a RER ne 8 3 Viewing Air Nette DAN nc mccain duene ane 8 3 ET EE REE EE RR ER 8 4 Site Management IP Address and VLAN Lumaeasemmmaenmnmenedmienads 8 5 Contiguring the ODU AAdress sisimat E enda
54. Status A B Operation Independent Unit Independent Unit Synchronization N A N A External Pulses Not Detected Not Detected Configure Operational States C Enabled These settings will apply to both sites Expected Operational States Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 5 8 HSS Settings The Synchronization Status dialog box displays the current status of each side of the link See Appendix G for instructions about installing and con figuring collocated links If you do not require HSS click Next Step 5 Services The Services dialog appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 8 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Services Ethernet Only Rate Mbps Adaptive Distance O Km 0 Miles z IDU A B Product 7 C 04 B000 7 C 04 B000 HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 00_b3065_Jun 7 2009 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 5 9 Services and Rates dialog TDM Services selection gt To select services 1 Click the Configure button The TDM services dialog is displayed Services Configuration TDM Type OF 1 3 2 4 Maximum Available Services Ethernet Only Select Selected O Remaining O 2 Using the TDM Type radio buttons choose E1 or T1 You are now able to select the required service ports Wi
55. System Hub Site Sync Q Air Interface B Management Inventory R Security Date amp Time Le Advanced sk Ethernet E TDM Services x External Alarms I Operations Figure H 9 HSS Not Supported Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 H 9 Appendix I BRS Installation Procedure BRS Link Activation In accordance with 2 5 GHz standard Wireless Link BRS links must be acti vated before use This is done at both ODUs independently before installa tion on site Both ODUs must be configured the same gt To Activate a BRS Link 1 Install Link Manager software as usual 2 When the Manager Main Screen is displayed it appears with the Link Sta tus label red and showing Inactive The Link Configuration and Link installation buttons are disabled Figure I 1 Inactive link state 3 Click Configuration gt Configure Location The Air Interface dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 I 1 BRS Link Activation Appendix I 4 Site Configuration Location File Actions vi Restore Backup System Q Air Interface 2 Hub Site Sync Refresh Buzzer On Installation Mode General Link ID B Management Inventory R Security Date amp Time TxPower Expected dBm Le Advanced ai Ethernet Current dBm H External Alarms Frequency 6 ti G Operations Bandwidth Single Band C Double Band Band Plan Pre Transition Post Transition
56. TDM Services Description Wireless Link X External Alarms Location I Operations Last Power Up 14 06 2009 14 29 11 OK Cancel Figure D 3 Configuration Dialog Box 9 Click the Management item in the left hand panel The following win dow is presented Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 D 3 The procedure Appendix D Site Configuration A File Actions Help ti gt Backup System Q Air Interface Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode Management Network Parameters VLAN 2 Hub Site Sync Inventory Security Date amp Time Le Advanced Ethernet TDM Services 2X External Alarms IP Address 10 0 0 120 Subnet Mask 25 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Trap Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I Operations 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 OK Cancel Figure D 4 Management Addresses Site Configuration dialog box 10 Enter the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway as requested For example the ODU used here is to be configured as follows Site Configuration A File Actions Help ti e Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode Management Network Parameters VLAN System Q Air Interface 2 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory a Security Date amp Time Le Advanced si Ethernet BB TDM Services W Externa
57. View ODU Rear View Figure 3 3 Integrated ODU Front and rear views IDU E or IDU R package containing e IDU E or IDU R e AC DC Converter e IDU wall mounting drilling template e Self adhesive label showing the IDU LED operation Figure 3 4 IDU E R front view IDU C Package Contents The IDU c package contains e IDU C see Figure 3 5 below e 19 rack mounting kit see Figure 3 7 below e Two DC power plugs for power cables see Figure 3 7 below eae Figure 3 5 IDU C Package contents the IDU C Ethernet only Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 4 PoE 8 Package Containing Chapter 3 NYTT IDU C OY NM PO va macas AUTOTA rar gas swor sko p BL TENTE a AS ofe tt j RE ca i s Figure 3 6 IDU C Package contents the IDU G 4 E1 T1 ports 46 49 Figure 3 7 IDU C Package contents the mounting kit and DC power plugs PoE 8 Package Containing M gt a Figure 3 8 PoE 8 Unit e PoE 8 e 110 240 VAC with IEC 60320 socket cable e 3 prong terminal block connector green e 19 mounting kit 1 The IDU C is available with 0 4 8 or 16 TDM ports Wireless Link supports 0 or 4 TDM ports Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 5 BDU Package Contents Chapter 3 BDU Package Contents Figure 3 9 BDU Chassis BDU 19 rack mounting kit see Figure 3 7 DC power plug for power cable External Antenna Package Contents Antenna RF cable 1m 3 long two cable
58. Was Activated Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Primary Link Is Active sfpExtraction 226 normal Indicates that a device was extracted from SFP Port sfpPort1Clear 227 normal Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to connected Contains two parameters 1 Description SFP port 1 status changed to connected s2 s Is the Eth mode speed amp duplex compatibleldus 228 normal Indicates that the ODU has identified compatible Idus on both sides of the link Link Manager Traps The Link Manager application issues traps to indicate various events These traps are shown in the Link Managerr Events Log A list of Trap Messages as displayed by the Link Manager is shown in Table 9 5 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 0 22 Appendix R External Alarms Specification External Alarms Specification Each of the three products IDU E AL IDU C and PoE 8 have a dry contact alarm relay through a standard DB9 or DB25 pin female connector There are two alarm types input and output Input alarms The input alarms are raised by events from external equipment such as a fire warning door open or air conditioner failure They are user defined Output alarms Output alarms are generated through dry contact relays to indicate vari ous system events such as sync loss or disconnection An alarm is raised if at least one of the condi
59. collocated units In addition to each unit being connected to its IDU or PoE device the collocated unit has an additional cable that is connected to the HSS Unit The HSS Unit is a compact weatherproof IP67 connector box that is installed on the same mast as the ODUS All collocated units connect to this box via CAT 5e cable Prepared lengths are available for purchase The HSS unit is supplied with ten protective covers any port not in use must be closed with a protective cover SYNC 1 SYNC 2 SYNC 3 SYNC 4 SYNC 5 FHSS Unit Coni ion Ports must be connected continuously When disconnecting a radio unit shift used ports to maintain continuous connectivity Figure H 4 HSS Interconnection Unit e If you collocate more than eight radios cascade two HSS Units with en an HSS cable S e Ensure that the collocated units are connected in sequence from Note SYNC 1 If an ODU is removed form the hub site then all remaining ODUs must be reconnected to maintain the connectivity gt To connect an ODU to the HSS 1 Unscrew the protective cover from the port marked SYNC 1 2 Connect the RJ 45 connector from one end of the prepared CAT 5e cable to SYNC 1 3 Connect the other end of the CAT 5e cable to the ODU connector labeled SYNC Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 H 3 ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout Appendix H 4 Tighten the protective seal that is on the prepared cable over the RJ 45 connector 5
60. courant La mise la terre est assur e en reliant la fiche d alimentation une prise de courant avec une protection de terre En outre e La cosse de masse sur l IDU C doit tre constamment connect e a la protection de terre par un c ble de diam tre de 18 AWG ou plus Le mat riel mont sur rack doit tre install seulement sur des racks ou armoires reli s la terre e Une ODU doit mise la terre par un c ble de diam tre de 12 AWG ou plus e Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d interrupteurs sur la connection la terre De plus e Il faut toujours connecter la terre en premier et la d connecter en dernier e Il ne faut jamais connecter les c bles de t l communication du mat riel non la terre e Il faut s assurer que tous les autres c bles sont d connect s avant de d connecter la terre Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 T 1 Protection contre la foudre Appendix T Protection contre la foudre L utilisation de dispositifs de protection contre la foudre d pend des exi gences r glementaires et de l utilisateur final Toutes les unit s ext rieures GE MDS sont con ues avec des circuits de limitation de surtension afin de min imiser les risques de dommages dus la foudre GE MDS conseille l utilisation d un dispositif de parafoudre suppl mentaire afin de prot ger le mat riel de coups de foudre proches Mat riel suppl mentaire requis L quipement requis pour l installation du mat
61. dialog box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Activation Appendix J 6 Enter the Link ID and note it for use with the second site of the link 7 Check the Master radio button 8 Click OK The following window appears Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help a x Site Location Site Get Diagnostics fix gt Link Link p y Location Site1 Site2 Link ID EBG 20561334 Radio Interface Services None Frequency GHz 5 510 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Status Probing Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate Site Location Tx Rate IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Probing Channel 5 510 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 30 03 2009 15 11 01 Connected to Location Internal E Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Figure J 3 The local ODU after activation Probing Notice that the Link ID is shown in the Link name pane 9 Repeat the above procedure for the remote ODU ensuring that in the Air Interface window that you enter exactly the same Link ID but this time that you check the Slave radio button If both ODUs are powered up after a minute or so a link will be estab
62. following Link Status messages are given fullCompatibility different software versions were detected that are fully compatible The message indicates that an upgrade is available restrictedCompatibility different software versions were detected that operate correctly However new features are not supported softwareUpgradeRequired different software versions were detected allow ing limited operation The message is that a software upgrade is required versionsIncompatibility different software versions were detected that are incompatible You need to perform local upgrades Table 9 2 Link Compatibility Trap Messages suv f Software Upgrade fullCompatibility Active Available Active in Software Software Upgrade restrictedCompatibility Version Recommended mismatch Active Software Software Upgrade softwareUpgradeRequired Upgrade Required Required Not Active versionsIncompatibility AE Local Eee P Upgrade Upgrade Required Required TDM Loopbacks Internal and external loopbacks on both sites of a link are used to test the TDM connections gt To activate a loopback 1 From the Maintenance menu choose Loopbacks or right click the TDM display in the main window The Loopbacks dialog box appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 3 TDM Loopbacks Chapter 9 Loopback Help Loopback Configuration Select Maximum Deselect All Select Maximum Deselect All
63. gt lt interval current day month gt according to user defined monitoring intervals set ip lt ipaddr gt lt subnetMask gt lt gateway gt Set the ODU IP address subnet mask and gateway The user must reset the ODU after the command completion set trap lt index 1 10 gt lt ipaddr gt lt port 0 65535 gt Set a specific trap from the traps table e g set trap 3 192 168 2 101 162 set readpw lt oldpasswd gt lt passwd gt Set the read access password Read Community set writepw lt oldpasswd gt lt passwd gt Set the read write access password Read Write Community Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 22 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 8 Table 8 2 Telnet Commands Continued Command Explanation set trappw lt oldpasswd gt lt passwd gt Set the trap Community string set buzzer lt mode 0 OFF 1 ON gt Toggle the buzzer mode 0 off 1 on set tpc lt power Value between minimal Tx power and maximal Tx power gt Set the ODU Tx Power If a wrong value is entered both min and max values shall be displayed in the error reply set bridge lt mode 0 Bridging OFF 1 Bridging ON gt Set the ODU bridge mode 0 off 1 on set name lt new name gt Set the name of the link set location lt new location gt Set the name of the location Set contact lt new contact gt Set the name of the site manager set Ethernet
64. la terre vannnnnnnnrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnennennn T 1 Protection contre Ja foudre ainoina EEEE T 2 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 xi Pr cautions de s curit pendant le montage de ODU rurvunvnnnvvnnunnnnnnnnnnvnnnunennnner T 2 Connecter la terre DIT ccntvesisnieiavivsvatviinincsendscnsinuninaiatcdnrounentievenasevounesueiel T 3 Installation sur pylone et MNT nomme T 3 Content dukit de montage ODU ineei i sete E a T 3 Montage sur un Pyl ne axxrnnrnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennunnnnernnennnennr T 4 Montage SUP UT TUR vassverk T 5 Montage d une antenne extemne sresmnanssrmannanevnvannnnmnvvsnennnbnnnnedsvsnnnnennen eres nense T 6 Contenu du kit de montage d une antenne externe osese T 6 Index Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 xii List of Figures FIGURE 1 1 TYPICAL CELLULAR BACKHAUL APPLICATION csceseccaceeseeseeaueuseusesaueavausaeees 1 3 FIGURE 1 2 TYPICAL BROADBAND ACCESS APPLICATION avnnvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen 1 3 FIGURE 1 3 TYPICAL WIFI BACKHAUL APPLICATION aununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 1 3 FIGURE 1 4 MULTI POINT TO POINT VIDEO SURVEILLANCE DEPLOYMENT csseseseeseueeeees 1 4 FIGURE 1 5 PRIVATE NETWORK ccccceccscuceueuseusevaueaueusessucauaueaueueaueuvaueuseuseuavenvauseesass 1 4 FIGURE 1 6 MULTI POINT TO POINT ENTERPRISE CONNECTIVITY auvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnenennnn 1 5 FIGURE 1 7
65. lished If you are still connected to the remote site from the previous steps the window of Figure J 3 will look like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 J 3 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Configuration Link Manager 192 168 2 102 Installer File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help Link Configuration Inst Site Location Site Location Get Diagnostics tink tink Link ID EBG 20561334 Services Ethernet Only Frequency GHz 5 580 Location Location Radio Interface RSS dBm Appendix J Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Ethernet Service Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate 7 Site Location Tx Rate IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors Counters Display Mode EE I Current Error Blocks ji Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 580 GHz Events Log Number 000001 000002 Date amp Time Message 30 03 2009 16 46 09 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in 30 03 2009 16 46 09 Connected to Location Trap Source Internal Internal 2 Connection Available Connection Made Network IP Address 192 168 2 102 Figure J 4 Both sites activated and awaiting configuration FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Configuration The Configuration procedure may be
66. loss of service will occur during re synchronization gt To Configure BRS Channel Settings 1 Set the Band Plan 2 Select the Bandwidth required e Single Band e Double Band 3 Select the Frequency from the pull down menu 4 Click Next The system is re synchronized to the changes Link Installation Wizard BRS Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in a Link re synchronization Configuration M BRS Notation BandPlan Pre Transition Post Transition Bandwidth Quad Band v Frequency MHz 42 43 61 B2 2518 50 B1 B2 B3 C1 2529 50 B2 B3 C1 C2 2535 00 B3 C1 C2 C3 2540 50 C1 C2 C3 D1 2546 00 C3 D1 v Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Quality No Serv Ethemet Ethernet TDM No Serv Ethernet Ethemet TDM Figure I 4 BRS Channel Settings Post Transition Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 I 3 Appendix J FCC IC DFS Installation Procedure FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Links Background The FCC IC regulation for 5 4 5 3 GHz allows unlicensed wireless data equipment provided that it does not interrupt radar services If radar activ ity is detected the equipment must automatically change frequency chan nel This feature is termed Dynamic Frequency Selection DFS According to the standard a channel with active radar is prohibited from use for 30 minutes Before using a channel for transmission the radio equipment must probe it for radar s
67. must be the same for each link within the collocated system Select the RFP that gives you the Best Fit for the system services and select the Channel Bandwidth accordingly The table below describes the efficiency of the Wireless Link air interface according to the RFP type radio products mix services and channel band width The table may be viewed in the Link Manager and in the Link Budget Calculator and varies according to the product used Table H 2 Radio Frame Pattern Table Example Channel Bandwidth Radio Product Mix RFP 20 MHz 10 MHz Wireless Link only 5 MHz Wireless Link only TDM Ethernet TDM Ethernet TDM Ethernet Wireless Link only With Wireless Mux Wireless Mux Considerations Wireless Mux radios use a Radio Frame Pattern of 1250 milliseconds regard less of HSS Hence the Wireless Mux performance as calculated with the Link Budget Calculator does not care if the radios operate in HSS mode or not Wireless Link Considerations When Wireless Link radios are collocated with Wireless Mux radios using HSS all radios must use a Radio Frame Pattern RFP of 1250 milliseconds Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 H 5 HSS Link Configuration Appendix H The performance of Wireless Link radios that operate with this RFP can be seen in the Link Budget Calculator when selecting RFP type E The following list summarizes the effect of 1250 milliseconds RFP on Wire less
68. or Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit mast lead in wire and discharge unit It also lays down the size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes The Wireless Link ODU must be grounded to a Protective Earth as described in Appendix C and in accordance with the Local Electrical Regulations The earth lug on the IDU C should be connected to the protective earth at all times by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider Rack mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks and cabinets Further you should Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last Never connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment Ensure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground More detailed guidelines are supplied in Appendix C Protection against Lightning The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements All outdoor units are designed with surge limiting cir cuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes GE MDS recom mends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes See Appendix C for detailed installation instructions of lightning protection devices General It is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional ins
69. or viewing online Help The offline functionality is shown in Table 4 3 below The table does not show menu items grayed out Table 4 3 Link Manager Offline Functionality Log Off to log on dialog Same as Log Off File Exit Exit the Link Manager Same as Exit button Software i n Upgrade Upgrades the ODU firmware in selected links Appendix F Spectrum View Not available for Wireless Link Change Tools Password Change the log on password page 4 7 Clear Events Clear local events log Events Log page 9 16 Save to File Save events log data to a file Preferences Set managing computer preferences ip Manager View online help version of the User Manual Link Budget Calculator Calculator opened in default browser Appendix B Help Get Diagnostics Information Obtain system information page 9 1 Atout Link Link Manager build information Manager gt To change the log on password Wireless Link User Manual Changing the Log On Password 1 From the Tools menu select Change Password The Change Password dialog box appears 2 Enter the current password and the new password 3 Click OK to confirm Release 1 9 First steps Chapter 4 First steps For what follows it is assumed that you have set the IP addresses of both ODUs For the purposes of illustration we will use the following IP addresses na BS Our managing computer has its NIC set to IP address 192 16
70. pause is signal quality decreased e One beep and a long pause is no air link e Any other signal does not relate to antenna alignment 6 Secure the site A ODU to the mast wall 7 At site B adjust the ODU slowly whilst listening to the beeper sequence until the best signal is attained 8 Secure the site B ODU to the mast wall 9 Monitor the link quality for about 15 minutes to verify stability Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 16 Chapter 4 Getting Started with the Link Manager Installing the Link Manager Application Minimum System Requirements The Link Manager application is distributed on a CD Operating system spe cific PC resources required by the application are set out in Table 4 1 below Table 4 1 PC Requirements for the Link Manager Application Memory 128 MB 512 MB 1 GB Processor P III PIV P IV Dual Core Requirements common to all systems are e Hard disk 1 GB free space e Network 10 100BaseT NIC e Graphics 1024x768 screen resolution with 16 bit color e Microsoft Explorer version 5 01 or later Installing the Software Any PC running the Link Manager application can be used to configure a Wireless Link link gt To install the Link Manager program 1 Insert the CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The installation starts automatically Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 1 Getting Started with the Link Manager Chapter 4 2 Follow the on screen ins
71. per air rate wbblduSrvTrunkCost 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 5 Integer RO Cost of the TDM Service in bps Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 15 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 12 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbblduSrvAvailServicesTable N A ODU Possible TDM Services table wbblduSrvAvailServicesEntry N A ODU TDM Services table entry INDEX wbblduSrvAvailServicesindex wbblduSrvAvailServicesindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 1 Integer RO Table index The index is the bit mask of the TDM service wbblduSrvAvailServicesState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 2 Integer RO Represents the TDM service availability wbblduSrvAvailServicesMinRateldx 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 3 Integer RO Minimum rate index of the air interface which make the service possible wbblduSrvAvailServicesMaxRateldx 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 4 Integer RO Maximum rate index of the air interface which make the service possible wbblduSrvAvailServicesReason 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 5 Integer RO Information about the TDM Service availability Not Applicable if the service is available The reasons for TDM Service unavailability The available throughput isn t sufficient for Service demands The IDU HW doesn t support the service A Link Password mismatch wa
72. pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when using the outdoor antenna kits in the United States or where FCC rules apply only those antennas certified with the product are used The use of any antenna other Warning than those certified with the product is expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47 CFR part 15 204
73. recommended wbbOduAdmBroadcast 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 10 Integer RW This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product wbbOduAdmHosts Table N A Trap destinations table Each trap destination is defined by an IP address and a UDP port Up to 10 addresses can be configured wbbOduAdmHostsEntry N A Trap destinations table entry INDEX wbbOduAdmHostsindex wbbOduAdmHostsindex RO Trap destinations table index wbbOduAdmHostsip 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 12 1 2 IpAddress RW Trap destination IP address A change is effective immediately wbbOduAdmHostsPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 12 1 3 Integer RW UDP port of the trap destination A change is effective immediately wbbOduBuzzerAdminState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 13 Integer RW This parameter controls the activation of the buzzer while the unit is in install mode A change is effective immediately The valid values are disabled 0 wbbOduProductld 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 14 DisplayString RO This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product wbbOduReadCommunity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 15 DisplayString RW Read Community String This parameter always returns when retrieving its value lt is used by the Manager application to change the Read Community String The SNMP agent ac
74. riel est le suivant e Pince sertir RJ 45 si un c ble pr assembl ODU IDU n est pas utilis e Perceuse pour le montage sur mur seulement e C bles de terre IDU et ODU e Clef 13 mm 12 e C ble ODU IDU si non command type ext rieur CAT 5e 4 paires torsad es 24 AWG e Colliers de serrage e Ordinateur portable avec Windows 2000 ou Windows XP Pr cautions de s curit pendant le montage de ODU Avant de connecter un c ble l ODU la borne protectrice de masse visse de l ODU doit tre connect e un conducteur externe protecteur ou un pyl ne reli la terre Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d interrupteurs sur la connection la terre Seulement un personnel qualifi utilisant l quipement de s curit appropri doit pouvoir monter sur le pyl ne d antenne De m me l installation ou le d montage de ODU ou de pyl nes doit tre effectu e seulement par des professionnels ayant suivi une formation gt Pour monter l ODU 1 V rifier que les supports de fixation de l ODU sont correctement mis la terre 2 Monter l unit ODU sur le pyl ne ou sur le mur se r f rer la Installa tion sur pyl ne et mur au dessous 3 Connecter la c ble de terre au point de ch ssis sur l ODU 4 Relier le c ble ODU IDU au connecteur ODU RJ 45 5 Visser les presses toupe de c bles pour assurer le scellement herm tique des unit s ODU 6 Attacher le c ble au pyl ne ou aux support
75. security features Changing the Link Password This item is only available when the link is down Otherwise it works the same way as the corresponding item on page 5 7 Link Manager Community Strings The ODU communicates with the Link Manager using SNMPv1 protocol The protocol defines three types of communities e Read Only for retrieving information from the ODU e Read Write to configure and control the ODU e Trap used by the ODU to issue traps The Community string must be entered at log on The user must know the password and the correct Community string to gain access to the system A user may have read only privileges It is not possible to manage the ODU if the read write or the read Commu nity values are forgotten A new Community value may be obtained from GE MDS Customer Support for the purpose of setting new Community You must also have available the serial number or the MAC address of the ODU The read write Community strings and read only Community strings have a minimum of five alphanumeric characters bru1 and bru4097 are not per mitted Changing the trap Community is optional and is done by clicking the check box Editing Community Strings The Community change dialog box is available from the Configuration Security tab Both read write and read only communities must be defined On logging on for the first time use the following as the current Commu nity Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 8 Link
76. signal lines and interface cables e The ambient operating temperature should be 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F at a humidity of up to 90 non condensing Stage 3 RF Survey SU The RF survey examines the wireless environment of the installation site to determine whether there are available channels within the radio operating frequency band An RF survey is performed using a spectrum analyzer It is advisable to familiarize yourself with the spectrum analyzer before going out on site specifically the Max Hold and Marker functions You should perform the RF survey at both proposed link sites The survey should be carried out during a busy time of day to best judge the worst case radio interference Allow 2 4 hours duration for a good RF survey It is possible to install the link and use the Link Manager to find a clear channel Each frequency channel can be evaluated in turn Achievement of a clear channel is indicated by the marker in the Quality bar on the Channel Setting window see Figure 5 5 moving into the green area Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 2 4 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation This chapter sets out the requirements and procedures for the hardware installation and alignment of a Wireless Link link in accordance with the prior planning as set out in Chapter 2 It is intended to guide qualified field technicians Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation p
77. t 0 e 15 minutes Intervals e Daily Table 9 3 Explanation of performance data Generic PM Data UAS Unavailable Seconds Seconds in which the interface was out of service ES Errored Seconds The number of seconds in which there was at least one error block Note that the notation of an error block is different per interface SES Severe Errored Seconds The number of seconds in which the service quality was low the quality is different per type of interface and determined by the BBER threshold per interface BBE Background Block Error The number of errored blocks in an interval A flag indicating that the data was valid Note that the Performance Monitoring data is not valid if not all the values Additional Air Interface PM Data Integrity were stored e g due to clock changes within the interval or power up reset Max RSL The maximum of the receive signal level measured in dBm Min RSL The minimum of the receive signal level measured in dBm Max TSL The maximum of the transmit signal level measured in dBm Min TSL The minimum of the transmit signal level measured in dBm RSL Threshold 1 The number of seconds in which the Receive Signal Level RSL was below the specified threshold RSL Threshold 2 The number of seconds in which the RSL was below the specified threshold TSL Threshold The number of seconds in which the Transmit Signal Level
78. the following table Table 1 3 User Manual General layout 1 Basic Installation Core information to install and operate a link 2 Advanced Installation Specialized installation techniques 3 Technical Information Background for advanced use The Basic Installation section is divided into functionally distinct chapters reflecting the activities required to set up a Wireless Link The division is shown in the following table Table 1 4 User Manual layout 2 Site Preparation Site survey team 3 Hardware Installation Field technician 4 en PTEE ONTE Installation technician Link Manager 5 Installing the Link Installation technician TheLink Manager Main oe 6 Window Installation technician System manager 7 Configuring the Link Installation technician System manager 8 Site Configuration Installation technician System manager 9 oo and Diagnos Installation technician System manager Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 15 A Little Terminology Chapter 1 A Little Terminology In the field a link typically has a local or headquarters site as for example in Figure 1 1 above Here the service provider is the local or headquarters site The service recipient is the remote site Where the link is completely internal to a corporation the choice of the local and remote is just a matter of convenience A link then consists of two sites In Broadband Wireless terminology the
79. two N type RF terminators The procedure The following procedure is generic to all Intrepid radio products What you see S amp S on your running Link Manager may differ in some details from the screen ote captures used to illustrate this Appendix gt To Preolad an ODU with an IP address 1 Using the IDU ODU cable connect the PoE device to the ODU ensuring that the cable is plugged into the PoE port marked P LAN OUT Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 D 1 The procedure Warning Appendix D 2 For connectorized ODUs screw the RF terminators into the two antenna ports A powered up ODU emits RF radiation from the antenna port or connected antenna When working with a powered up connectorized ODU always use RF terminators For an ODU with an integrated antenna ensure that the antenna is always directed away from other people 3 Connect the Poe device to AC power 4 Using a crossed LAN cable connect the LAN IN port of the PoE device to the Ethernet port of the managing computer The ODU will commence beeping at about once per second indicating correct operation 5 Launch the Link Manager 6 At the log on window choose Local Connection FA Link Manager A lersion 8 3 05 Build 8353 IP Address Local Connection Password Figure D 1 Log on Window for Local Connection 7 Enter the default password admin After a few moments the Link Man ager main window appears
80. with read only permission click the Read Only Mode check box The Link Manager main window is displayed see Figure 4 8 Log on Errors Unsupported Device Attempting to connect to an unsupported device on an otherwise valid IP address for example a LAN printer will result in the following error mes sage Device unreachable Unsupported device Please check the IP Address was entered correctly Figure 4 6 Unsupported device message Incorrect IP Address If the IP address chosen is invalid or the link is unreachable the following error message will be displayed Device unreachable Please check IP Address was entered correctly Ping connection to the device Read Only Community string setting in the login dialog Forgotten community string can be retrieved From product label or Technical Support Do you want to continue Figure 4 7 Unreachable device message In both of the above situations you will see a warning graphic T along side the IP Address field Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 6 Incorrect Password Incorrect Password Chapter 4 If you type an incorrect password in the Login window you will see a warn ing graphic J alongside the password field Continuing without an IP Address The Link Manager provides limited offline functionality when there is no accessible IDU ODU It is primarily for setting managing computer related parameters running the Link Budget Calculator
81. 0 4 Click the check box if you want to keep the current IP address settings 5 Click Yes to continue Please Wait Site will be reset After a few moments the site will be reset and you will need to log on to it to re install the link IDU Detection An ODU always tries to detect the IDU to which it is connected IDU Detec tion is effected by an IDU responding to special ODU packets If a POE device is in use the detection packets spread to the containing net work and may cause flooding In such a case the IDU Detection feature Figure 8 18 should be disabled To disable IDU Detection Mode just toggle the check box in Figure 8 18 Managing Configuration Files Backup Configuration to a File Link Manager allows you to backup configuration parameters of the local and remote units to the managing computer as binary files Each site is backed up in a separate file gt To save the configuration in a file 1 Choose a site to back up The Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click Backup 3 In the Save As dialog box indicate in which folder and under what name configuration file is to be saved and click Save Restoring a Configuration File Configuration files can be uploaded from the managing computer To restore a configuration file 1 Choose a site to restore from a previous backup Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 20 Muting the alignment tone buzzer Chapter 8 The Configur
82. 012 min year Figure B 9 Calculation of distance from site coordinates 5 Located to the right of the green Coordinates button is a drop down list of Climactic C Factor values It is only available if you choose a non adap tive rate WBB B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex WBB Link Budget RIGEBIFCCIINT v 20 MHz Auto M 5 8 GHz 9 Mb s BPSKO 75 M 16 dBm 4 16 dB dB dB 6 dB 38 dBm 6 3 Watt 0 1Km 0 1 Miles 46 Km 28 6 Miles Expected Performance 46 Km M Good C 0 25 Good C 0 25 Average C 1 Moderate C 2 Difficult C 4 Very Difficult C 6 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only w Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Calculate Figure B 10 Climactic C Factors Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 v downtime 7012 min year B 10 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix B For help about what these mean click the button to the right of the list in Figure B 10 RADWIN 2000 Link Budget WinLink Link Budget Product WL1000 ODU FS8 FCC INT vi Channel RFP Frequency 20 MHz M Auto M 58 GH
83. 1 29612 1000 100 1 DisplayString RO Trap s Description Used for Trap parameters wbbGeneralTrapSeverity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 100 2 Integer RO Trap s Severity Used for Trap parameters wbbGeneralCookie 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 100 3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product wbbGeneralEcChangesCounter 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 100 4 Integer RO Wireless Link User Manual MIB Traps General Each ODU can be configured with up to 10 different trap destinations When the link is operational each ODU sends traps originating from both Site A and Site B The source IP address of the trap is the sending ODU The trap originator can be identified by the trap Community string or by the trap description text Each trap contains a trap description and additional relevant information Such as alarm severity interface index time stamp and additional parame ters See Table Q 3 for additional information Release 1 9 Q 18 Trap Parameters Trap Parameters Table Q 3 MIB Traps Sheet 1 of 4 Appendix Q Name ID Severity Description trunkStateChanged 1 normal Indicates a change in the state of one of the TDM trunks Raised by both sides of the link Contains 3 parameters 1 Description TDM Interface n x2 Yn Is the trunk number3 x Is the alarm type and can be one of the following Normal AIS LOS Loopback linkUp 2 normal Indicates that the radio li
84. 1 5 40 7 1 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service 6 under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW20MH 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under Z 7 Channel BW of 20MHZ in the specific Radio Frame Pattern Hub Site Synchronization supported patterns A unique ID which is common to the HSM and all its collocated ODUs wbbOduAirLockRemote 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 41 Integer RW This parameter enables locking the link with a specific ODU The following values can be set Unlock default The ODU is not locked on a specific remote ODU Unlock can only be performed when the link is not connected Lock The ODU is locked on a specific remote ODU Lock can only be performed when the link is active wbbOduAirAntennaGain 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 42 Integer RW Current Antenna Gain in 0 1 dBi resolution User defined value for external antenna Legal range MinAntennaGain lt AntennaGain lt MaxAntennaGain wbbOduAirFeederLoss 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 43 Integer RW Current Feeder Loss in 0 1 dBm resolution User defined value for external antenna wbbOduAirMaxAntennaGain 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 44 Integer RO Maximum allowed Antenna Gain in 0 1 dBi resolution wbbOduAirMinAntennaGain 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 45 Integer RO Minimum allowed Antenna Gain in 0 1 dBi resolution wbbOduAirMaxEIRP 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 46
85. 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 2 Connection Available Connection Mode Network Location Radio Interface RSS dem Ethernet Service Ethernet Throughput Mbps TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks Frequency 5 780 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 9 6 Site A port 2 set to loopback gt To deactivate a loopback e Return to the situation of Figure 9 4 and click None When a loopback is deactivated the corresponding icon in Figure 9 6 reverts to its previous state like the right side of the figure Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 5 Local External Loopback Chapter 9 Local External Loopback A Local external loopback can be set to test the local E1 T1 port and its con nection to local side user equipment In this mode data coming from the local user equipment is looped back to it This loopback is initiated from a managing computer connected to the local unit IDU C Test Equipment Figure 9 7 Local External Loopback Remote Internal Loopback A remote internal loopback can be set to test connection between the local and remote units and between the local E1 T1 port and its connection to the local user equipment In this mode data com
86. 12 1000 1 1 30 DisplayString RO This is the product name as it exists at EC wbbOduAdmActivationKey 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 31 DisplayString RW Activates a general key wbbOduSrvMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 1 Integer RW System mode The only values that can be set are installMode and slaveMode normalMode reserved to the Manager application provided with the product A change is effective after link re synchronization wbbOduSrvBridging 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 3 Integer RO Bridging Mode Valid values are disabled 0 wbbOduEthernetRemainingRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 1 Integer RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps wbbOduEthernetlfT able N A ODU Ethernet Interface table wbbOduEthernetlfEntry N A ODU Ethernet Interface table entry INDEX wbbOduEthernetlfindex wbbOduEthernetlfindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 1 Integer RO ODU Ethernet Interface Index wbbOduEthernetlfAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 5 DisplayString RO ODU MAC address wbbOduEthernetlfAdminStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 6 Integer RW Required state of the interface wbbOduEthernetlfOperStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 7 Integer RO Current operational state of the interface wbbOduEthernetlfFailAction 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 8 Integer RW Failure action of the interface wbbOduEthernetNumOfPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 3 Integer RO Number of ODU network interfaces wbbOduBridgeBasePortTable N A ODU Bridge Ports tabl
87. 5 v 18 dBm 4 16 dB dB dB e dB 38 dBm 6 3 Watt 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles 46 Km 28 6 Miles Expected Performance 46 Km il Good C 0 25 M 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only Y 98 666 availability downtime 7012 min year 1xE1 net Only 2xE1 4xE1 bt 1xT1 4xT1 Msx Trunks Figure B 13 Services selector Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 12 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix B 7 Click Calculate to obtain the required performance estimate E Placing the cursor in any other calculated field will also update the calculated results Note The Expected Performance parameters are calculated and displayed e Expected RSS the expected RSS that the Link Manager shows when the Wireless Link ODUs are optimally aligned e Services Type max number of T1 or E1 trunks if Max Trunks is selected e Ethernet Rate maximum throughput available for the chosen parameter combination e Antenna height for LOS the minimum antenna height required for line of sight operation It is the sum of the height required for boresight clearance due to the earth s curvature plus the height required to clear the Fresnel zone If the expected performance is not suitable for your application try different parameters and repeat the calculation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 13 Appendix C Lightning Protection and Grounding G
88. 6 Login showing Community Options 4 4 Login showing user types 4 4 Manager Software 4 2 Name 5 4 Wireless Link User Manual Release1 9 Password 9 20 changing 5 5 Post Configuration main window 7 11 Post Installation main window 5 18 Site names 5 4 Link Budget Calculator see LBC 9 8 Link ID 4 10 5 4 8 22 9 19 9 19 9 20 Link Lock described 8 10 Enable 8 10 Link Site Planning 2 1 Survey 2 1 Stage 1 Preliminary Survey 2 2 Stage 2 Physical Survey 2 3 Additional Indoor Site Requirements 2 4 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements 2 4 Stage 3 RF Survey 2 4 Login Errors Incorrect IP Address 4 6 Incorrect password 4 7 Unsupported Device 4 6 loopback activating 9 3 deactivate 9 5 Local Internal 9 7 Remote External 9 6 Remote Internal 9 6 M Management Addresses 8 5 and trap addresses 8 1 Configuring the Site 8 2 Screen Telnet 8 24 Manager Software Change log on password 4 7 Events Log 6 7 Installing 4 1 Main window 6 1 Details pane 6 4 Toolbar 6 2 main window 4 6 Monitor pane 6 5 Ethernet Service 6 5 Radio Interface 6 5 Radio signal strength 6 5 Off line functionality 4 7 Status Bar 6 7 Manual Chapters by Audience Conventions Terminology Index 3 MHS described K 1 Installation Procedure K 1 K 1 Installing K 3 Kit Contents K 3 Maintaining K 10 IDU Replacement K 10 ODU Replacement K 11 Monitoring K 12 Port pinout O 2 Primary and secondary links K 2 provides K 2 Switching Logic K 13 System Operati
89. 7 4425Km About the Fresnel Zone The Fresnel zone pronounced frA nel with a silent s is an elliptically shaped conical zone of electromagnetic energy that propagates from the transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna It is always widest in the middle of the path between the two antennas Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 3 About the Fresnel Zone Appendix B First Fresnel re TER zone Curve ha Expected Range Figure B 1 Fresnel zone Fresnel loss is the path loss occurring from multi path reflections from reflective surfaces such as water and intervening obstacles such as build ings or mountain peaks within the Fresnel zone Radio links should be designed to accommodate obstructions and atmo spheric conditions weather conditions large bodies of water and other reflectors and absorbers of electromagnetic energy The Fresnel zone provides us with a way to calculate the amount of clear ance that a wireless wave needs from an obstacle to ensure that the obsta cle does not attenuate the signal There are infinitely many Fresnel zones located coaxially around the center of the direct wave The outer boundary of the first Fresnel zone is defined as the combined path length of all paths which are half wavelength 1 2 3 of the frequency transmitted longer than the direct path If the total path distance is one wavelength 1 longer than the direct path then the outer boundary is said to be
90. 8 The Telnet log on user name is the password that you used to enter the Link Manager for example the default admin The Telnet password is the corresponding Community string default netman ex Telnet 192 168 2 101 login admin Password admin 192 168 2 1 1 gt Type help for help adminG192 168 2 1 1 gt Figure 8 20 Telnet session log on A Read Only Community string allows display only whereas a Read Write Community string allows display and set commands Supported Telnet commands are shown in Table 8 2 Note that some of the commands are model specific For example TDM commands will not apply to Ethernet only and PoE based links Table 8 2 Telnet Commands Command Explanation display inventory Displays ODU product name Name Location hardware and software revisions uptime MAC address IDU product name IDU software and hardware revisions display management Displays IP Subnet Gateway Traps table display link Displays State Link ID Channel BW RSS TSL Frequency ACS DFS Rate ARA Distance display ethernet Displays Bridge Mode Aging time Port table State Status and action display tdm Displays Clock Mode Master Clock Mode Current Clock Quality TDM table Line status Error Blocks display ntp Displays Time Server and Offset display PM Shows the performance monitor tables for each interface lt interface AIR LAN1 LAN2 TDM1 TDM2 TDM4
91. 8 2 100 The Ote log on ODU is set to IP address 192 168 2 101 and the over the air ODU is set to 192 168 2 102 The Subnet Mask for both sites is 255 255 255 0 and the Default Gateway is left unset We will maintain this arrangement throughout the remainder of this manual At this point the main window of the Link Manager should be displayed Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x a Configuration Link Installation Site Location Site Location Get Diagnostics fix gt Link Link Link ID Services None Frequency GHz 5 780 RSS dBm Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps 6 Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Location Location Radio Interface Status Installation Required Ethernet Throughput Mbps IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 TDM Service Counters Display Mode sceurmlatie Current Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks bin Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 TDM Ports T 7 Frequency 5 780 GHz Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address Events Log S Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 4 8 Opening Link Manager window prior to installation IDU C Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 8 First steps Chapter 4 Link
92. ABLE H 1 ODU HSS UNIT CONNECTION PINOUT cesccsesceeeceeeeueecueeuuseueeueseeeeaueeeass H 4 TABLE H 2 RADIO FRAME PATTERN TABLE EXAMPLE aunnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnne H 5 TABLE O 1 ODU IDU RJ 45 CONNECTOR PINOUT avarnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnne O 1 TABLE O 2 FAST ETHERNET CONNECTOR PINOUT imaunnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnne O 1 TABLE O 3 FAST ETHERNET CONNECTOR PINOUT imaunnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnne O 2 TABLE O 4 TRUNK PORTS E1 T1 RJ45PINOUT auuvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnernnnnnnnnnne 0 2 TABLE O 5 HOT STANDBY RJ 11 PORT PINOUT avavnnvnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnne 0 2 TABLE O 6 IDU ALARM CONNECTOR DRY CONTACT cccecesseeeeceseeeeeneeeeseaaeeesaaaeeesaaaees O 3 TABLE O 7 TERMINAL BLOCK 3 PIN 48VDC i anaunnnnavnnnnnannavnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 0 4 TABLE O 8 TERMINAL BLOCK 2 PIN 48VDC i avannnnnnvnnnanannavnnnnennnannennnnnnannnnennnnnnnnnnnne 0 4 TABLE P 1 SFP TYPE AND INTERFACE DESCRIPTION uanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne P 1 TABLE Q 1 SUPPORTED RFC 1213 VARIABLES sennannrvanvenneennsnnsvanvenneennsnnsnnnsennendnsnnsnnne Q 4 TABLE Q 2 PRIVATE MIB PARAMETERS sad alene ap Q 5 TABLE 053 MIB TRAPS keen Q 19 TABLE R 1 IDU C OUTPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION uannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne R 1 TABLE R 2 IDU C INPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION aunavnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne R 2 TABLE
93. AIS only for TDM serv state P g the remote and local IDUs are at e At least one of the ports with NORMAL state service configured at local IDU are at LOS or AIS only for TDM serv state Link Loss due to Power Fail A Link Loss occurred while a power fail Lirik iS up or EE down PIQUE Output 4 at the remote End was detected by the remote end IDU the power fail indication withini the Y last two seconds of the active link Table R 4 IDU E AL Input Alarms Description Input 1 Input 2 User Defined User Defined User Defined Input 3 External Alarm External Alarm On External Alarm Off Input 4 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 PoE 8 Alarms PoE 8 Alarms Table R 5 PoE 8 Output Alarms Description Appendix R ODU Current LED Indicator Output 1 Over Current Red Off Power LED Indicator Output 2 Power out of range Red Green Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Appendix S Reserved Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 S 1 Appendix T Regional Notice French Canadian Proc dures de s curit G n ralit s Avant de manipuler du mat riel connect des lignes lectriques ou de t l communications il est conseill de se d faire de bijoux ou de tout autre objet m tallique qui pourrait entrer en contact avec les l ments sous ten sion Mise la terre Tous les produits GE MDS doivent tre mis la terre pendant l usage
94. Clear Counters gt Link TPSF_BTT Location P Link ID EBG 20561334 Services DEL Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 510 RSS dBm Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Status Link Active Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate Tx Rate IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 TDM Service VEPSER Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks IP Address 192 168 2 102 E1 Ports Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 30 03 2009 15 11 01 Connected to Location Internal S Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure J 6 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz operational Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 J 6 Appendix K Monitored Hot Standby Installation Procedure What is Monitored Hot Standby The Monitored Hot Standby MHS a k a 1 1 is a duplicated link set up as a primary link and a secondary link in hot standby mode as shown in Figure K 1 below Site A 1 2 Site B 1 4 Primary EGG 2 2 Secondary ssssss MHS 22255 cable e To user equipment equipment Figure K 1 Monitored Hot Standby MHS provides redundancy and backup to TDM services It is designed to provide high reliability high capacity Point to Point links The MHS is Wireless Link User Manual R
95. DU 000042 3 30 2009 10 40 05 AM Transmitting on channel 5 270 GHz ODU 000023 3 30 2009 10 37 35 AM Transmitting on channel 5 280 GHz ODU 000040 3 30 2009 10 38 26 AM Transmitting on channel 5 280 GHz ODU lt amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 2 2 WBB Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure K 9 Secondary Link operating as the Hot Standby link Notice that the active link notice is highlighted in red so that there is no mistaking which link is operational Maintaining an MHS Link IDU Replacement There are two situations which must be treated differently Situation 1 To replace either of the IDUs at Site 1 4 or the secondary IDU at Site 1 2 nothing special is required Simply disconnect the IDU to be replaced and replace it with a new one Replacing a secondary link IDU obviously has no effect on the TDM service Disconnecting the Site 1 4 primary IDU activates Hot Standby After the Site 1 4 primary IDU is replaced the Link will detect the change and switch back to the primary link If you replaced the Site 1 2 secondary IDU remember to reconnect the MHS cable Situation 2 Replacing the Site 1 2 primary IDU is different and requires several steps Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 10 ODU Replacement Appendix K gt To replace the Site 1 2 primary link IDU 1 Power off the Site 1 2 primary IDU This activates the secondary link using Hot Standby 2 Run the Configuration m
96. E 8 14 BRIDGE CONFIGURATION SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX esseceseeveveas 8 17 FIGURE 8 15 ETHERNET INFORMATION RATE THROUGHPUT SELECTION sesesseseseevaveas 8 17 FIGURE 8 16 TDM MHS STATUS aununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnvnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 8 18 FIGURE 8 17 EXTERNAL ALARMS CONFIGURATION annnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 8 18 FIGURE 8 18 SITE CONFIGURATION RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULTS scsecesseseuseeceeevaueas 8 19 FIGURE 8 19 ALIGNMENT TONE BUZZER STATES anannunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 8 21 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 xiv FIGURE 8 20 TELNET SESSION LOG ON sunanannnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnennnnnnnenennnnnennenene 8 22 FIGURE 8 21 TELNET MANAGEMENT WINDOW cccccceceeceeseseveuseususaueuvaueuseusavaveusnunanas 8 24 FIGURE 9 1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DIALOG BOX cccccecescescuseeeveusaueuseusevaueusauseeaueauausauses 9 2 FIGURE 9 2 LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION BOX sceseceecaveuscusueaueueaueuseuseuaueuseuseeaueauausaueuss 9 4 FIGURE 9 3 LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION BOX WITH ONE SITE PORT SELECTED sis 9 4 FIGURE 9 4 LOOPBACK OPTIONS uaunnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnenennnn 9 4 FIGURE 9 5 LOOPBACK DEFINED avnunnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn 9 5 FIGURE 9 6 SITE PORT 2 SET TO LOOPBACK uarnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenen 9 5 FIGURE 9 7 LOCAL EXTERNAL LOOPBACK 1 aun
97. ESSING THE LINK BUDGET CALCULATOR ccceseeseceuceseesaueuseuseeaveuvauseeness B 5 FIGURE B 3 LINK BUDGET WINDOW cccececceceucueeusaueuseuseeaueusaueusnusevaueuseuseeaueavausausess B 6 FIGURE B 4 PRODUCT SELECTOR iaaunnvannnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen B 7 FIGURE B 5 CHANNEL BANDWIDTH SELECTOR cceceseaceuseeeucavausaueusuueusaueuseuseeaueuvauseenas B 7 FIGURE B 6 RFP SELECTOR auannunnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnsnnnannnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsnnennn B 8 FIGURE B 7 RFP SELECTION GUIDE avanvannnnnnnnnannavnnnnnannnvnnnnnsnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnennr B 8 FIGURE B 8 RATE SELECTOR ccescssaeseccecuccusessesueaueaueusueueeauaueausesueeusausasnaseeavausaenesness B 9 FIGURE B 9 CALCULATION OF DISTANCE FROM SITE COORDINATES ccsesecaveuseusesaeeevaueas B 10 FIGURE B 10 CLIMACTIC C FACTORS cccceseucausueeceeaueusaususeucuvaueaususeeaueauausuueusevaueas B 10 FIGURE B 11 CLIMACTIC C FACTOR DESCRIPTION cseceveeseuseseuceuausuveuseeaueauausuususavaneas B 11 FIGURE B 12 WORLD MAP SHOWING C FACTOR CONTOURS anannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn B 12 FIGURE B 13 SERVICES SELECTOR sseccececaveccaueueeueeuaueuseusuesusauaueueusevaueauauseususanaueas B 12 FIGURE C 1 GROUNDING ANTENNA CABLES seececceceueususucaueuvaueusnusevaueuseuseeaueavausausess C 2 FIGURE C 2 GROUNDING A TYPICAL POLE INSTALLATION uaneannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn C 3 FIGURE C 3 GROUNDING A TYPICAL WALL INSTALLATION u
98. EXAMPLE OF LINK ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM COMPONENTS sseseeseseseaveuseueess 1 6 FIGURE 1 8 ODU FORM FACTORS ccccececcusaveusueeueaueuseusueaueuvaueuseueevaueuueusevaueavausauenss 1 7 FIGURE 1 9 AIND ALL INDOOR UNIT CONNECTED TO ANTENNA savnnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennen 1 9 FIGURE 1 10 IDU E AND IDU R FRONT VIEW saaunnnnavnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 1 9 FIGURE 1 11 TYPICAL IDU E REAR PANEL cccccseceseesceseecueuuaueuseueevaueuseusueaueavausaueass 1 9 FIGURE 1 12 IDU E AL WITH ALARMS PORT sauvannannnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 1 10 FIGURE 1 13 IDU R REAR PANEL ccccceceseescueueeeceuaueuseuseesecuvaueuueuseuaueauauseueusevaueas 1 10 FIGURE 1 14 BACKUP LINK FOR E1 T1 CONNECTIONS ccceccesseccceeeeeuceseusausauvenseeseas 1 10 FIGURE 1 15 IDU C ETHERNET ONLY FRONT PANEL cecceccsecseceeseeeceeeeeeeeaueeesesaesaes 1 11 FIGURE 1 16 IDU C 4 E1 T1 PORTS FRONT PANEL sranrenonnnnnnnnnnnverannnnnnnnnnnvrnnnunnnnen 1 11 FIGURE 1 17 BASIC POE DEVICE SHOWING THE RADIO ETHERNET PORT sceseesessusesaueas 1 11 FIGURE 1 18 O POE DEVICE cccecceccececeveusususueeueaueuseuseeaueusauseseuseeaueusausesauuanaueas 1 11 FIGURE 1 19 POE 8 UNIT uka ae AEE ad oh vd ibe ed lue nee eg manwedl 1 12 FIGURE 1 20 ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA SIDE AND FRONT VIEWS 1 12 FIGURE 1 21 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS FLAT PANEL aevavnanavnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 1 13 FIGURE 1 22 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS PARABOLIC DIS
99. H uarannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 1 13 FIGURE 1 23 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS GRID ANTENNA avavnnvnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 1 13 FIGURE 1 24 LINK MANAGER WINDOW s ararnnvanvnnnnnnnnnvnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnne 1 14 FIGURE 1 25 MENU NAVIGATION IN THE LINK MANAGER i avnnrnrnannnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnsannene 1 18 FIGURE 1 26 SITE CONFIGURATION WINDOW WITH OPEN MANAGEMENT PANEL sise 1 18 FIGURE 3 1 ODU MOUNTING KIT auvnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn 3 3 FIGURE 3 2 CONNECTORIZED ODU FRONT AND REAR VIEWS suaunnvnnvnvnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnannennenen 3 3 FIGURE 3 3 INTEGRATED ODU FRONT AND REAR VIEWS varnannnnnvnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenen 3 4 FIGURE 3 4 IDU E R FRONT VIEW ccsccssccusccuccessusecuseeussuuusauseuuseussuussaueeueesuusaueseas 3 4 FIGURE 3 5 IDU C PACKAGE CONTENTS THE IDU C ETHERNET ONLY 3 4 FIGURE 3 6 IDU C PACKAGE CONTENTS THE IDU C 4 E1 T1 PORTS 3 5 FIGURE 3 7 IDU C PACKAGE CONTENTS THE MOUNTING KIT AND DC POWER PLUGS 3 5 FIGURE 3 8 POE 8 UNIT sie 3 5 FIGURE 3 9 BDU Laastad ease 3 6 FIGURE 3 10 TYPICAL INSTALLATION DIAGRAM WITH EXTERNAL ANTENNA ecceseeeeeeeees 3 7 FIGURE 3 11 TYPICAL IDU E REAR PANEL aunnannvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 10 FIGURE 3 12 IDU R REAR PANEL avavarnuvnnnnnnannvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 10 FIGURE 3 13 IDU C FRONT PANEL auvnnnnvnnnnn
100. HQ HSM Remote Site 1 Operation Hub Sync Master Independent Unit Synchronization NJA Not Supported External Pulses Generating Not Supported Figure H Z Hub Site Configuration dialog box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 H 7 Site Configuration Site Configuration Appendix H For units that support HSS the Hub Site Sync option appears in the Air Interface section and displays the current HSS of the unit Configure the unit from the Link Configuration Wizard according to the procedure described above i Site Configuration HQ HSM File Actions t Restore Backup System Air Interface Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security Date amp Time oO Advanced ai Ethernet XX External Alarms I Operations 9 Buzzer On Installation Mode CIES Synchronization Status Status HQ HSM Operation Hub Sync Master Synchronization NJA External Pulses Generating Configure Operational States F Operational State Radio Frame Pattern RFP Configuration Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 TDM Eth Best Best NED Use Wizard for configuration changes Wireless Link User Manual Figure H 8 Site Configuration Hub Site Sync dialog box The following figure is displayed when the hardware does not support HSS These units may be used as independent remote units Release 1 9 Site Configuration Appendix H i Site Configuration A pr Installation Mode ET
101. Hub Site Synchronization external pulse detection status wbbOduAirHssExtPulseType 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 5 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse type wbbOduAirHssDesiredExtPulseT ype 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 6 Integer RW Hub Site Synchronization required external pulse type Valid values for read write typeA 2 wbbOduAirHssRfpTable N A ODU Radio Frame Patterns RFP Table wbbOduAirHssRfpEntry N A ODU RFP Table entry INDEX wbbOduAirHssRfpindex wbbOduAirHssRfpindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer RO ODU RFP Table index The index represent the 1 Radio Frame Pattern typeA 2 wbbOduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW5MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service 2 under Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW5MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under 3 Channel BW of 5MHZ in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW10MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service 4 under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW10MH 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under z 5 Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW20MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000
102. Hz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service SAR ESS Ethernet Throughput Mbps a Rx Rate Tx Rate Radio Interface RSS dem IP Address 10 103 31 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address 10 103 31 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 780 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 22 06 2009 16 07 33 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in Internal 000002 22 06 2009 16 07 34 Connected to Location Internal Encrypted Link Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 103 31 10 Figure M 3 Link Manager window for VS showing asymmetric throughput The Configuration wizard is similar to the Installation wizard Site configura tion is also standard Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 M 2 Wireless Link Part 3 Technical Information Broadband Wireless Transmission User Manual Release 1 9 Appendix N Technical Specifications Radio Wireless Visual Link Surveillan Wireless Link Wireless Link HE Access ce Capacity net throughput full duplex 2Mbps 2 5Mbps 18Mbps Range Maximum 20 Km 13 miles 80 Km 50 miles Occupied Frequency Frequency Bands and Regulatory Compliance WPC India 5 8 Product type range GHz Compliance FCC 47CFR Part 15 ESS
103. Interference 1 7 Events color codes 9 16 log 9 2 9 8 priority 9 16 Expected Signal Level for AIND radios G 1 F Factory settings revert to 8 1 8 19 9 20 FEC N 2 N 2 G Gateway 8 2 Telnet display 8 22 H HSS H 1 Hardware Installation H 3 IDU C front panel LEDs 3 13 ODU HSS Connection Pinout H 4 Radio Frame Pattern Table H 4 Hub Site Synchronization see HSS I IDU Aging time 8 15 aging time ODU Bridge Mode 8 15 Connecting to ODU 3 13 described 1 9 IDU C Alarm Connector 0 3 Front panel 1 11 1 11 Described 3 11 LEDs 3 11 3 12 4 2 Front panel LEDs for HSS LEDs 3 13 Mounting 3 10 Power connections 3 13 3 13 Wireless Link User Manual Release1 9 IDU E Back Panel 1 9 3 10 IDU R Back Panel 1 10 3 10 Installing IDU R 3 10 Installing IDU E and R units 3 9 Package Contents 3 4 IDU C Package Contents 3 4 IDU E or IDU R package contents 3 4 Indoor Unit see IDU Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality 6 3 Post Configuration main window 7 11 Post Installation main window 5 18 see Link Installation Installation Mode 8 2 8 2 8 16 Installing BRS I 1 J 1 Interference caused by collocated units H 2 Environment 1 7 Inventory 8 1 8 9 Displaying 8 7 IP address 8 2 Telnet display 8 22 J Jitter Buffer 5 12 K Key Features of Radio Link L LAN o PoE to PC cable 0 2 Port For PoE 8 0 2 LBC 9 8 Browser warnings B 6 Calculations B 2 Climactic C Factors B 10 described B 1 Fresnel Zone described B 3 Internal d
104. LAN priority is used for the traffic sent from the ODU to the managing computer Using VLAN for management traffic affects all types of man agement connections local network and over the air 7 Enter a Priority number between 0 and 7 8 Change the VLAN ID and Priority of the managing computer NIC to be the same as those of steps 6 and 7 respectively Changing this parameter causes the Link Manager to immediately disconnect To avoid inconvenience you should verify the change by setting the VLAN only to one ODU and only after verifying proper Caution management operation change the other ODU VLAN setting 9 Click Apply or OK i Site Configuration A File Actions Help Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off i Installation Mode Air Interface Network Parameters VLAN 22 Hub Site Sync O Enabled B Management Inventory R Security Date amp Time G Advanced VLAN ID VLAN Priority ad Ethernet amp TDM Services 2X External Alarms I Operations OK Cancel Figure 8 5 Configuring management traffic VLAN Settings Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 6 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID Chapter 8 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID If the VLAN ID is forgotten or there is no VLAN traffic connected to the ODU then reset the relevant ODU During the first two minutes of connection the ODU uses management packets both with and without VLAN You may use this period to reconfigure the VLAN ID a
105. Link Budget Calculator from the main menu of the Link Manager as in the following figure Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance B65 Link Manager Help Fi B Link Budget Calculator Get Diagnostics Get Diagnostics Information About Link Manager i Figure B 2 Accessing the Link Budget Calculator However invoked your browser displays the following page Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 5 Running the Link Budget Calculator WBB B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Appendix B WBB Link Budget R G58 FCC INT v 20 MHz M Auto J GHZ Rate 9 Mb s BPSK 0 75 v Tx Power fe dBm 4 16 Tx Antenna Gain 22 dB Rx Antenna Gain 2 dB Cable Loss o J Fade Margin 6 dB Tx Power EIRP 38 dBm 6 3 Watt Min Range 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles Max Range 46 Km 28 6 Miles Expected Performance Distance Climate 48 va Km 7 Good C 0 25 Expected RSS Fade Margin 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only W 98 666 availability downtime 7012 min year Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Figure B 3 Link Budget window e Microsoft Internet Explorer users may see a warning message like this x To help protect your security Internet Explorer has restricted this webpage from running scripts or Active
106. Link Link Chapter 1 gt gt Monitored Hot Standby 1 1 The Monitored Hot Standby supports equipment and air inter face redundancy with less than 50 ms cut over time for carriers and operators gt gt Enhanced Air Interface Security Wireless Link s AES 128 bit key encryption provides enhanced air interface security gt gt Advanced Management and Performance Monitoring The Wireless Link Manager software has full local and remote man agement capabilities The user friendly SNMP based management tool provides full end to end configuration event log and perfor mance monitoring capabilities gt SFP support in the IDU C Standard SFP modules are used enabling any type of Ethernet phys ical connectivity including various fiber connections E3 T3 or E1 T1 over Ethernet SFPs can be used as well Wireless Link Link The Wireless Link point to point solution is a wireless communication link Typically each side of the link is comprised of an Outdoor Unit ODU and antenna and an Indoor Unit IDU or PoE device as shown in Figure 1 7 below The link is managed by the SNMP based Link Manager application The IDU and the ODU are connected by a CAT5e cable that carries the ser vice traffic and power Radio Link i ODU IDU af Essa sr Figure 1 7 Example of Link Architecture System Components The Outdoor Unit ODU The ODU is the radio transceiver of the Wireless Link system and is t
107. Link User Manual Release 1 9 H 6 HSS Link Configuration Appendix H e Hub Sync Client Continue Transmission HSC CT e Independent Unit e Synchronization e N A for Master or Independent Units e Synchronized for Hub Site Clients e Not Synchronized for Hub Site Clients e External Pulses The status of the pulses running through the HSS cable The Master generates such pulses The severity of each of these states is indicated by by green yellow or red text color gt To configure the Operational States of the Hub Site unit 1 Click the Enabled check box 2 Click the Configure button The Hub Site Configuration dialog box with the current status of the ODUSs is displayed 3 Select the type of unit configuration from the drop down list 4 Select the appropriate RFP radio button Some RFP options may be dis abled depending on the BW previously selected Take care to avoid incorrect configuration of bandwidth RFP or to set multiple Hub Sync Masters as system interference can occur Link Manager gives error messages and tool tips if the system is configured with mismatches HIE 8 o S Hub Site Configuration Operational States These settings will apply to both sites Le Remote Site 1 Hub Sync Master v Independent Unit Hub Sync Master R Hub Sync Client Continue Tx Hub Sync Client Disable Tx _ TDM Eth Best Best ED Aadio Frame Pattern selection depends on the Channel BW and Service Status
108. Link radios These effects should be considered in when planning new installations e Only Channel Bandwidths 20 and 10 MHz are supported e For products supporting a maximum throughput of 18 1 Mbps the maximum Ethernet throughput is 14 5 Mbps at the 20 MHz channel and 9 3 Mbps at the 10 MHz channel e The 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth is supported only in Wireless Link ACCESS products e For products supporting maximum throughput of 21 4 Mbps the maximum Ethernet throughput is 22 5 Mbps at the 20 MHz channel and 9 3 Mbps at the 10 MHz channel HSS Link Configuration For HSS enabled units the Hub Site Synchronization Settings dialog box appears in the Link Configuration Wizard Link Configuration Wizard Hub Site Synchronization Settings Settings for reducing mutual interference between multiple units at the Hub Site Synchronization Status Status HQ HSM Remote Site 1 Operation Hub Sync Master Independent Unit Synchronization NJA Mot Supported External Pulses Generating Not Supported Configure Operational States M Enabled These settings will apply to both sites Expected Operational States Monitor Link Radio Interface Remote Site 1 RSS dem ETBE Figure H 6 Hub Site Synchronization Settings dialog box The Synchronization Status dialog box displays the current status of each side of the link e Operation Type of unit e Hub Sync Master HSM e Hub Sync Client Disable Transmission HSC DT Wireless
109. MDS Intrepid ia 5 a L O 7 JED Wireless Broadband Link Version 1 9 MDS 05 4572A01 Rev C FEBRUARY 2010 Digital Energy MDS Note This document contains information that is proprietary to GE MDS No part of this publication may be reproduced modified or distributed without prior written authorization of GE MDS LLC This document is provided as is without warranty of any kind Statement of Conditions The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice GE MDS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this document or equipment supplied with it Information to User Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment Copyright O 2010 by GE MDS LLG All rights reserved Regulatory Compliance General Note This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply The frequency bands in which the system operates may be unlicensed and in these bands the system can be used provided it does not cause interference FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device
110. Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help a x F r j amp Link Installation Site Location Site Location Get Diagnostics Link Link Location Location Location Link ID terfac Services None Radio Interface Frequency GHz 5 780 RSS dBm SE Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps 6 Ethernet Service Status Installation Required Ethernet Throughput Mbps 227 Rx Rate 0 0 Site Location Tx Rate 0 0 IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 g Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Estimated Time Between Errors istTrunk sn Errors Blocks fh Site Location 2nd Trunk IP Address 192 168 2 102 Errors Blocks Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 780 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 2 Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 4 9 Opening Link Manager window prior to installation IDU E A detailed field by field description of the contents of the Link Manager main window may be found in 6 The procedure required to make the link functional has three phases 1 Link Installation which we will detail below Installation actually gets the link operational by setting the link parame ters It uses a fixed channel at the lowest possible modulation BPSK at 6 5Mbps and will work under the harsh
111. Manager Community Strings Chapter 8 e For Read Write Community use netman e For Read Only Community use public e For Trap Community use public gt To change a Community string 1 From the Configuration dialog box choose the Security tab 2 Type the current read write Community default is netman 3 Choose the communities to be changed by clicking the check box 4 Type the new Community string and re type to confirm 5 Click OK to save by Change Community A Enter current Read Write Community Read write Community New Confirm Read Only Community New Confirm Trap Community New Confirm Hide characters Forgot Community Figure 8 8 Changing the Community String Forgotten Community string If the read write Community string is unknown an alternative Community key can be used The alternative Community key is unique per ODU and can be used only to change the Community strings The alternative Community key is supplied with the product and should be kept in a safe place If both the read write Community and the alternative Community key are unavailable then an alternative Community key can be obtained from GE MDS Customer Support using the ODU serial number or MAC address The serial number is located on the product label The serial number and the MAC address are displayed in the Site Configuration inventory tab When you have the alternative Community key cli
112. P Support The Small Form factor Pluggable SFP transceiver is a compact hot plug gable transceiver used in communications applications The SFP transceiver technology allows almost any protocol converter imple mentation with seamless integration to a standard Ethernet switch The IDU C supports SFP transceivers to provide and support several net work applications Any standard Fast Ethernet FE SFP transceiver can be plugged into the IDU C These SFPs support various Ethernet interfaces For example a fibre optic interface can be used to support long fibre distances In addition System on SFP transceivers can be used supporting a proto col converter concept The main application for such SFP transceivers is TDM over Ethernet providing E1 T1 or E3 T3 over full duplex Ethernet Remote Bridge The following table provides a few SFP types that can be used with the IDU C Table P 1 SFP Type and Interface description 100baseT 100BaseT IEEE 802 3 UTP CAT5 100baseFX Multimode fiber optic MMF link spans up to 2km long 100baseLX Single mode fiber optic SMF links pans up to 10km 100baseBX SMF single strand link spans up to 10 km or 40 km E3T3 FE E3 T3 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 P 1 Appendix Q MIB Reference Introduction About the MIB The MIB is a set of APIs that enables external applications to control Intrepid equipment The MIB is divided into public and a private API g
113. T R H G54 FCC CO EXT R H G54 HP EXT R G58 FCC EXT D G58 FCC EXT 4T1 R H G58 FCC EXT R H G58 UK EXT R H G58 IND CO EXT R G58 ET SI EXT R G59 HP EXT PoE R H G59 HP EXT M a 5 8 GHz All v availability downtime 7012 min year 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Figure B 4 Product selector 2 Choose the channel bandwidth WBB B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex WBB Link Budget R G58 FCC INT v 20 MHz W Auto M 5 MHz E 5 8 cHz 10 MHz K 0 75 dB dB dB dB 38 dBm 6 3 Watt 0 1Km 0 1 Miles 46 Km 28 6 Miles he 18 dBm 4 16 Expected Performance 46 Km Good C 0 28 M 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only M 98 666 availability downtime 7012 min year 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Figure B 5 Channel Bandwidth selector Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 7 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix B 3 For a collocated links choose the RFP Use the Help button to the right of the RFP selection box for help WBB B Link Budget Produc
114. TANDBY TAB seseeseseeseees K 5 FIGURE K 5 SERVICES CONFIGURATION PANEL HOT STANDBY MODE SELECTION suis K 6 FIGURE K 6 THE PRIMARY LINK UNDER NORMAL OPERATION auannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannennenen K 7 FIGURE K 7 THE SECONDARY LINK UNDER NORMAL OPERATION cssecsesecaveuseususaueavausaueuss K 8 FIGURE K 8 PRIMARY LINK A FEW SECONDS BEFORE REGULAR NO LINK DISPLAY esesseseees K 9 FIGURE K 9 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AS THE HOT STANDBY LINK csesceseeseseusevaeeas K 10 FIGURE K 10 PRIMARY LINK AFTER THE SWITCH OVER TO SECONDARY LINK csseseeeeveusaveess K 13 FIGURE K 11 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH OVER TO SECONDARY K 14 FIGURE K 12 PRIMARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH BACK FROM SECONDARY K 15 FIGURE K 13 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH BACK TO PRIMARY eseeees K 16 FIGURE L 1 CASCADED LINK WITH TWO HOPS savarnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannennnnnn L 1 FIGURE L 2 CONFIGURING AN IDU R IN A CASCADED LINK cesccceceucecusaueuseuseeaeeavauseueass L 2 FIGURE M 1 COLLOCATED BASIC VS CONFIGURATION sseseececeueaueuseesueevausuueusevaueaveusens M 1 FIGURE M 2 VS SERVICES WINDOW FOR VS ccsecseceseuseceuceesusaueusueusauausaueusuvausaveusens M 2 FIGURE M 3 LINK MANAGER WINDOW FOR VS SHOWING ASYMMETRIC THROUGHPUT M 2 FIGURE O 1 EXAMPLE FOR CONNECTING THE ALARM CONNECTOR ccsesseceseusaueuseeeesaveuvens 0 4 FIGURE Q 1 TOP LEVEL SECTIONS OF THE PRIVATE MIB Q 3 FIG
115. TDM JITTER BUFFER CONFIGURATION ETBE EVALUATION BAR 5 14 FIGURE 5 17 SERVICES AND TDM DELAY SET LINK READY FOR EVALUATION sceseesaueas 5 14 FIGURE 5 18 TDM PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION 1 5 15 FIGURE 5 19 INSTALLATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY ccessececeuseusecaueusaususeusevaueuveusanas 5 17 FIGURE 5 20 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MGR AFTER INSTALLATION WITH LOADED TRUNKS 5 18 FIGURE 6 1 MAIN WINDOW WIRELESS LINK IS ACTIVE sccsccceceeeeeseeceeeeaeeeeeeseeeaeesaes 6 2 FIGURE 6 2 ETHERNET THROUGHPUT INDICATION sanannavnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 6 6 FIGURE 7 1 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD cccececevecueuseesucaveusaueueeueuvaueuseusevauenvausuenass 7 3 FIGURE 7 2 CONFIGURATION WIZARD SYSTEM DIALOG BOX ssccecsecsseeeeeeeseeseeeueeeeeeeeaees 7 4 FIGURE 7 3 CHANNEL SETTINGS DIALOG BOX AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION munies 7 5 FIGURE 7 4 SEARCHING FOR THE BEST OPERATING CHANNEL eseseecsesecueuseusesaueavausaueuss 7 6 FIGURE 7 5 CHANNEL SETTINGS WITHOUT AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION sseseeseueeeeees 7 6 FIGURE 7 6 CHANNEL FREQUENCY OPTIONS cccececeeceueuscusueaeeueaueuseuseeaueuseuseeaueavausaueuss 7 7 FIGURE 7 7 CHOOSING AN OTHER OPERATING CHANNEL FREQUENCY scesseesseeseeuesaueeees 7 7 FIGURE 7 8 HSS SETTINGS det ee ent fouet 7 8 FIGURE 7 9 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG anuvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 7 9 FIGURE 7 10 TDM PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION ianunnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
116. TDM Parameters Configure the TDM Parameters below TX Clock 1 3 m E Transparent Transparent Select Maximum Kij J gt Loop Timed Recovered Deselect All A Recovered Loop Timed Master Internal Recovered ef Recovered Internal ri Supposed Monitor Link a Radio Interface RSS dBrn 51 O Oo sec min hour day monthyear sec min hour day monthyear 3 Click the required parameter Their meanings are as follows nus BS Please keep in mind that what follows is per port Transparent Transparent The clock at Site A regenerates the clock from Site B and vice versa Loop time Recover The Site A port receive clock is used as the transmit clock for that port on both sides of the link Recover Loop time The Site B port receive clock is used as the transmit clock for that port on both sides of the link Internal Recover The Site A port uses its internal oscillator to generate its transmit clock while the Site B port regenerates the clock received at the Site A port Recover Internal The Site B port uses its internal oscillator to generate its transmit clock while the Site A port regenerates the clock received at the Site B port 4 Click Finish to complete the wizard Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 16 Installation Chapter 5 Step 7 Installation Summary and Exit Link Installation Wizard Completing the Link Installation Wizard You have successfully completed th
117. Time Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 13 Ethernet Properties Chapter 8 i Site Configuration A File Actions Help ki P Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off i Installation Mode System Date amp Time Air Interface 5 NTP Server 194 164 127 6 2 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security Offset Minutes og 00 00 HH mm Le Advanced ak Ethernet B TDM Services XX External Alarms Date amp Time 09 09 2005 22 04 40 Change I Operations chanse Figure 8 12 Date and Time configured from an NTP Server 8 Click OK to return to the Configuration dialog Ethernet Properties Configuring the Bridge Bridge configuration is required in various network topologies such as pro tection Ethernet 1 1 and ring applications The bridge configuration parameters are located under the Advanced tab of the Site Configuration dialog box i Site Configuration A File Actions Help ki EM E Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Q Air Interface Bridge Configuration 22 Hub Site Sync ODU Mode Bridge B Management Inventory R Security IDU Aging Time sec Ethernet Ports Configuration Date amp Time Pot Curent Mode Radio Link Failure Action Advanced ODU 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Detect N s Ethernet LAN 1 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Detect No Action v B TDM Services LAN 2 Disconnec
118. U wbblduEthernetSfpProperties 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 3 5 DisplayString RO SFP venfor properties Vendor Name wbblduBridgeTpAging 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 4 4 2 Integer RW Timeout in seconds for aging Note that for this parameter to be effective wbblduTdmTxClockAvailStates 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 1 1 Integer RO Available states of the TDM Transmit Clock Control wbblduTdmTxClockDesiredState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 1 2 Integer RW Required state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control A change is effective after re activation of the TDM service wbblduTdmTxClockActualState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 1 3 Integer RO Actual state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control wbblduTdmMasterClockAvailOptions 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 2 1 Integer RO Available options of the TDM Master Clock Control wbblduTdmMasterClockDesired 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 2 2 Integer RW Required TDM Master Clock A change is effective after re activation of the TDM service wbblduTdmMasterClockActual 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 2 3 Integer RO Actual Trunk used for TDM Master Clock wbblduTdmConfigTable N A IDU TDM Links Configuration table wbblduTdmConfigEntry N A IDU TDM Links Configuration table entry INDEX wbblduTdmConfigindex Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 16 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 13 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type g
119. URE T 4 MONTAGE SUR UN PYL NE arannannnannannesnnsnnnannnannennnannnnnnsannennnsnnnnnssnnnsnnnnnn T 4 FIGURE T 5 MONTAGE SUR UN MUR avannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen T 5 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 xvi List of Tables TABLE 1 1 ODU SERIES TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS anannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 1 8 TABLE 1 2 WIRELESS LINK FREQUENCY BANDS AND RADIO REGULATIONS seseesesseseveusees 1 8 TABLE 1 3 USER MANUAL GENERAL LAYOUT ccccceeceeeeceveuseusueeueusaueuseuseeaueuvauseeness 1 15 TABLE 1 4 USER MANUAL LAYOUT ccceccececsecceeusaueusueeusaueusaususaueueaueuseuseuaueuvauseenass 1 15 TABLE 3 1 COMPONENTS OF AN IDU C FRONT PANEL auvavanvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnen 3 11 TABLE 3 2 IDU C FRONT PANEL LEDS cccccccesaceecessesaueuseususaueuuaueuseusevaueusauseeness 3 12 TABLE 3 3 IDU C FRONT PANEL LEDS FOR HSS ccccecesecseueeeeeeevaueuseusevaueuveuseenass 3 13 TABLE 4 1 PC REQUIREMENTS FOR THE LINK MANAGER APPLICATION scesessaveuseeeesaveusens 4 1 TABLE 4 2 USER TYPES DEFAULT PASSWORDS AND FUNCTION sceceecseeeeceeeeeeeeeeesseeeetars 4 5 TABLE 4 3 LINK MANAGER OFFLINE FUNCTIONALITY ouaunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 4 7 TABLE 4 4 DEFAULT SETTINGS menes nent en nee dd nn ed 4 10 TABLE 5 1 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD avarnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnne 5 2 TABLE 6 1 LINK MANAGER TOOLBAR i aunnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnn
120. ackup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off g Installation Mode System Q Air Interface z Operation Independent Unit T Management Synchronization N A 2 External Pulses Not Detected Inventory a Security Synchronization Status Configure Operational States Date amp Time Operational State Le Advanced si Ethernet ae TDM Services it External Alarms Independent Unit I Operations Use Wizard for configuration changes OK Cancel Figure 8 3 HSS Status Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 4 Site Management IP Address and VLAN Chapter 8 Site Management IP Address and VLAN Configuring the ODU Address Each site must be configured separately For an over the air configuration first configure site B then site A so as to avoid lockout See Appendix D for detailed instructions about the best way to do this on site gt To define the Management Addresses 1 Choose a site to configure The Configuration dialog box opens i Site Configuration A File Actions Help Hi P Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Management Air Interface Network Parameters VLAN 22 Hub Site Sync IP Address B Management Inventory Security Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Date amp Time Trap Destination G Advanced IP Address a Ethernet B TDM Services ZY External Alarms I Operations
121. ameter which is its description 1 Description HSS operating state was changed to HSC DT HSC CT vlanModeActive 22 normal Indicates to non VLAN PC that after 2 minutes the system will support only VLANtag on management interface Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description VLAN Mode is active Non VLAN traffic will be blocked in 2 minutes tdmServiceAlarm 100 major Indicates that TDM Service is in alarm state Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM Service Alarm ethServiceClosed 101 major Indicates that Ethernet Service is closed Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Ethernet Service is closed ethServiceNotPermitted 102 major Indicates that Ethernet Service is not permitted Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description A valid IDU could not be detected at s Please check your configuration s Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link encryptionAlarm 103 major Indicates an encryption key mismatch Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Encryption Status Failed No Services are available changeLinkPasswordAlarm 104 major Indicates that a failure has occurred while attempting to change the Link Password Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Failed to chang
122. amp Fps Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate Tx Rate 2 Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Activation Required IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Link State Inactive i Events Log Number 000001 Trap Source IP Address Internal Date amp Time Message 30 03 2009 14 47 32 Connected to Location 2 Connection Available Connection Made Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Figure J 1 Activating an ODU Inactive link When the Manager Main Screen is displayed it appears with the Link Sta tus label red and showing Inactive 4 Click Site Location Air Interface for the logged in site 5 The Air Interface dialog box opens 4 Site Configuration Location File Actions Help a 2 D e Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Auto Installation Mode System Air Interface Air Interface 2 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory a Security Date amp Time Le Advanced si Ethernet TDM Services W External Alarms I Operations General Link ID TxPower Expected dBm Current dBm Installation Parameters Installation Frequency GHz Other v Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 v O Master Slave iD Available Channels Operation A To Activate the Site fill Link ID configure Master Slave and click OK Apply Figure J 2 Air Interface
123. anager on the secondary link and in the Hot Standby panel of Figure K 5 above check the Disabled button 3 Replace the Site 1 2 primary IDU without connecting it to the ODU to prevent transmission by the primary link with the undefined IDU 4 Reconnect the MHS cable between the IDUs at Site 1 2 5 Again run the Configuration Wizard on the secondary link and in the panel of Figure K 5 above check the Secondary button to re enable the link as secondary 6 Connect the new Site 1 2 primary IDU to its ODU The Hot Standby will automatically revert to the primary link within 50ms ODU Replacement Both the primary and secondary replacement ODUs require pre configura tion prior to insertion into the link The items to be pre configured are e HSS mode e Link ID e Frequency e Hot Standby mode using the new Services panel in Figure K 5 above e IP address optional m Pre configuration must be carried out before the new ODU is S amp S connected to its IDU If you try to do it live against its IDU it will Note cause spurious transmissions and a service break gt To pre configure an ODU 1 Attach the new ODU to an IDU or a PoE device 2 Run the Link Manager and use Hot Standby tab of Figure K 5 above to configure the new ODU to Primary or Secondary mode as required 3 Ensure that it is set to the proper HSS mode in accordance with Figure K 5 above Enter the required Link ID and frequency gt To re
124. anvannnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn C 4 FIGURE C 4 ODU SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING eceseeseseueeseesaueuseuseeaueusauseeness C 4 FIGURE C 5 TRANSTECTOR S SURGE SUPPRESSOR sccceceeececceeeusaueeeueuseuseuseusauseuueueeaues C 5 FIGURE C 6 SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING AT BUILDING ENTRY POINT seseesesseesees C 7 FIGURE D 1 LOG ON WINDOW FOR LOCAL CONNECTION iuanvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennr D 2 FIGURE D 2 OPENING LINK MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION ssessesesaseaveusees D 3 FIGURE D 3 CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX unnavnvnnvnnnannvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennr D 3 FIGURE D 4 MANAGEMENT ADDRESSES SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ssseesesaveesees D 4 FIGURE D 5 ODU WITH IP ADDRESSING CONFIGURED avanvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnennvnnnnnnnnnnnennr D 4 FIGURE D 6 CONFIRMATION OF IP ADDRESS CHANGE unnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennvnnnnnnnnnnnennr D 4 FIGURE D 7 MAIN WINDOW AFTER IP ADDRESS CHANGE auvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennr D 5 FIGURE E 1 BECOMING INSTALLER vuvanvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen E 2 FIGURE E 2 OPENING LINK MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO BAND CHANGE DEFAULT CIRCLED E 3 FIGURE E 3 CHANGE BAND DIALOG uavanvnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn E 3 FIGURE E 4 DIFFERENT BAND SELECTED uvuvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen E 4 FIGURE E 5 CHANGE BAND CONFIRMATION annnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnn
125. arm outputs in the form of dry contact relays The Alarm interface is located on the front panel of the IDU C and is a 25 pin D type female connector See Appendix K for wiring specifications and pinout You may enable or disable each of the alarms and configure the alarm description text appearing in the alarm trap message The ODU sends the alarm within less than a second from actual alarm trigger gt To set the external alarm inputs 1 Choose External Alarms from the Site Configuration window Site Configuration A File Actions Help ti G B Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System External Alarms External Alarm Input l Air Interface poden al 22 Hub Site Sync gt Input1 Clear Disabled v Alarm Description B Management Inventory Input2 Clear Disabled v Alarm Description R Security Input3 Clear Disabled v Alam Description Date amp Time Input4 Clear Disabled v Alarm Description Le Advanced ik Ethernet a TDM Services External Alarms I Operations OK Cancel Figure 8 17 External Alarms Configuration Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 18 Resetting Chapter 8 2 Choose an alarm and set its mode to Enabled or Disabled 3 Enter a description of the alarms in the text field 4 Click Apply to save 5 Click OK to exit from the dialog Resetting You may reset the link preserving the current configuration or reset to fac tory defaults
126. ary and secondary will be referred to their respective names Primary Link and Secondary Link as shown in Figure K 1 above despite their having yet to be installed gt To install a Hot Standby Link 1 Set up Primary Link in the usual way Ensure that it is fully operational in accordance with the relevant instructions in Part 1 of the User Manual lin S Do not proceed unless this condition is fully met Note 2 Connect user equipment to Site 1 4 3 At Site 1 2 disconnect the TDM cables from the external equipment or disconnect external equipment from the Hot Standby Patch Panel 4 The HSS cable connecting the ODUs should be connected at Site 1 2 The ODU belonging to the primary link should be configured as HSM whereas the ODU belonging to the secondary link should be configured as HSC CT Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 4 Installing an MHS Appendix K 5 Establish Secondary Link in the usual way with HSS enabled The two link frequencies should be at least 5MHz apart 6 Connect the MHS cables at Sites A and B as shown in Figure K 1 and Figure K 3 above 7 Run the Configuration Wizard for Primary Link Activate TDM services in the usual way Notice that there is a new tab Hot Standby in the Ser vices Configuration panel Link Configuration Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration TOM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Services 2xE1 Ethernet Rate Mbps adapt
127. as been closed The reason is s s Is the reason incompatibleODUs 9 critical Indicates that the ODUs are incompatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Incompatible ODUs incompatiblelDUs 10 major Indicates that the IDUs are incompatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Incompatible IDUs incompatibleOduldu 11 major Indicates that the ODU and IDU are incompatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description The IDU could not be loaded The reason is s s Is the incompatibility type probingChannel 12 normal Indicates that the ODU is monitoring radar activity Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Monitoring for radar activity on channel n GHz n is the channel frequency in GHz radarDetected 13 normal Indicates that radar activity was detected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Radar activity was detected in s on channel n GHz s Is the site name n Is the channel frequency in GHz transmittingOnChannel 14 normal Indicates that the ODU is transmitting on channel Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Transmitting on channel n GHz n Is the channel frequency in GHz scanningChannels 15 normal Indicates that the ODU is scanning channels Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Des
128. at for each of the event types gt To set the message background color e Click Background Color to change the text background gt To reset the message colors e Click Reset Settings to return to the default color settings Saving the Events Log You can save recorded events in an Events Log text file New alarms are automatically added to the text file as they enter the Events Log Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 16 Active Alarms Chapter 9 Active Alarms Upon setting a trap destination applicable events are reported as active alarms to the user The active alarms are saved and can be viewed in the Active Alarms window gt To view summary of saved alarms 1 From the Tools menu choose Active Alarm Summary 2 Choose either of the sites offered The Active Alarms Summary window opens Active Alarms Site A File View Help i Refresh Site Description Interface ne ST OE AA SFP port 01 status changed to disconnected SFP Port 01 on Idu 02 09 2005 21 56 43 TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm Figure 9 17 Active Alarms Summary The active alarms display does not update itself until the Refresh button is used The following table provides an explanation of the command buttons Table 9 6 Active Alarms command buttons Save Saves the alarms in CSV or text format for further analysis Refresh Shows the active alarms at the moment of refresh Site Selects site for the active ala
129. ata B 1 Running B 5 User input B 1 Lightning and Grounding Guidelines C 1 Link Budget Calculator see LBC Configuration Step 1 Start the Wizard 7 3 Step 2 System Parameters 7 3 Step 3 Channel Settings 7 4 Step 5 Hub Site Synchronization Settings 7 8 Index 2 Step 6 Services 7 8 Step 7 TDM Clock Configuration 7 9 Step 8 Configuration Summary and Exit 7 10 default frequency 5 6 default Settings 4 10 Information 9 1 Air Interface Thresholds BBER Threshold 9 12 Ethernet Thresholds Capacity 9 13 Ethernet Thresholds Traffic 9 13 RSL Threshold 9 12 TSL THreshold 9 12 Air Interface Thresholds setting 9 12 Alarms Active summary 9 17 Error detection and 9 17 output 9 19 saved 9 17 Compatibility 9 2 Trap messages 9 3 Events Log 9 8 Events log 9 13 Events references trap background color 9 16 default colors 9 16 Preferences 9 16 saving 9 16 Monitor log 9 8 9 8 saving 9 8 Performance data explained 9 11 Performance monitoring 9 8 Performance Reports 9 9 Remote Power Fail Indication 9 18 Dying Gasp circuit 9 19 Troubleshooting 9 19 Installation 4 8 ODU Mast and Wall A 1 Step 1 Start Wizard 5 3 Step 2 System Parameters 5 3 Step 3 Channel Settings 5 6 Step 5 Hub Site Synchronization Settings 5 8 Step 6 Services 5 8 Step 7 TDM Clock Configuration 5 15 Link ID 4 10 5 4 8 22 9 19 9 19 9 20 Login 4 3 Login Errors Incorrect IP Address 4 6 Incorrect password 4 7 Unsupported Device 4
130. ately after power up the fastest way is to enter install mode Setting the Maximum Information Rate The maximum Ethernet throughput of the link can be limited The default setting is Best Effort see Figure 8 13 above where the highest informa tion rate available for the link conditions and settings is used gt To limit the Ethernet information rate 1 From the Configuration menu choose the site to reconfigure 2 Click Advanced Ethernet The Configuration dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 16 TDM MHS Status Chapter 8 Site Configuration A File Actions Help ki P 6 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Ethernet Q Air Interface Bridge Configuration 22 Hub Site Sync ODU Mode Bridge B Management Inventory Security Date amp Time IDU Aging Time sec Ethernet Ports Configuration a Advanced ODU 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Detec Ethernet LAN 1 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Detect re Action B TDM Services LAN 2 XX External Alarms Disconnected Auto Detect w No Action Operations Information Rate Maximum Kbps EEE Figure 8 14 Bridge Configuration Site Configuration dialog box 3 In the Information Rate pane use the drop down menu to choose the maximum Information Rate 4 Site Configuration A File Actions Help tl h Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode
131. ates 2 Choose the required Channel Bandwidth Link Installation Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization Installation Channel GHz 5 780 Channel Bandwidth MHz Automatic Channel Selectid Available Channels List GHz 5740 M5755 5 770 5785 5 800 5815 5 745 5 760 5 775 5 790 5 805 5 820 5 750 5 765 5 780 5 795 5 810 5 825 i gt Select All Clear All A Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem S No Serv Ethernet Ethemet TDM No Serv Ethernet Ethemet TDM Quality mm ON ES ME Figure 5 7 Channel Settings Showing available Channel Bandwidths Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 7 Installation Chapter 5 in S ACS is only supported for a Channel Bandwidth of 20 MHz Note 3 Click the check box if Automatic Channel Selection is required 4 The Available Channels List contains all of the allowable channels for the link Check the channels that can be automatically selected Selecting a new channel causes the system quality to change The Qual ity bar provides an indication of the link quality from No serv ice red to Ethernet TDM green as shown in the bottom of Figure 5 7 above 5 Click Next Step 4 Hub Site Synchronization Settings Link Installation Wizard Hub Site Synchronization Settings Settings for reducing mutual interference between multiple units at the Hub Site Synchronization Status
132. ation dialog box opens 2 Click Restore 3 From the Open dialog box choose file to upload and click OK Backup files are specific to a site IDU ODU pair and Link ID Do not restore a backup configuration file to a site other than that from Caution which it was originally taken Muting the alignment tone buzzer The ODU alignment tone becomes audible as soon as power is supplied and continues until the ODUs are aligned and the link established It is possible to mute the tone during regular operation of the link It must be enabled when performing the alignment procedure gt To mute the alignment tone buzzer 1 Choose a site The Configuration dialog box opens 2 In the Configuration dialog box click the Buzzer button J Buzzer Auto Inst EM y Auto On Off WIIBIESS LIK Figure 8 19 Alignment tone buzzer states 3 Click Off The tone is disabled gt To restore the alignment tone buzzer 1 Choose a site The Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click On to have the buzzer beep continuously or Auto to have the buzzer beep only in install mode Configuration with Telnet A Telnet terminal can be used to configure and monitor the Wireless Link To start a Telnet session use telnet lt ODU IP gt For example if you run Telnet as follows telnet 192 168 2 101 you will be asked for a user name and password Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 21 Configuration with Telnet Chapter
133. aximum Deselect All Master Clock i independent Clock Per Port Supported Monitor Link fa Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 7 10 TDM Parameters Configuration To configure the TDM Parameters see the corresponding procedure in 5 Step 7 Configuration Summary and Exit Link Configuration Wizard Completing the Link Configuration Wizard You have successfully completed the Link Configuration Wizard Services 3xE1 Ethernet Channel GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Link ID EBG 29561334 To close this wizard click Done Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 7 11 Configuration Wizard Exit Summary Click Done to return to the main window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 10 Configuration The main window now reflects the configuration Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help ty x Link Configuration Lini Link TPSF BTT Link ID EBG 29561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 E Connection Available Connection Mode Network Location Radio Interface RSS dBm Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Chapter 7 Ethernet Service Ethernet Throu
134. bbOduPerfMonEthintervalEthCapacityT RO The number of times throughput was below hreshUnder threshold in the each interval wbbOduPerfMonEthIntervalHighTrafficTh RO The number of times actual traffic was above reshExceed threshold in the each interval wbbOduPerfMonEthDayTable N A This table defines keeps the ethernet counters of the last month in resolution of days wbbOduPerfMonEthDayEntry N A This is an entry in the Days Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonEthDayldx RO This table is indexed per Day number Each intervalis of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonEthDayRxMBytes RO Current RX Mega Bytes per day wbbOduPerfMonEthDayTxMBytes RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day wbbOduPerfMonEthDayEthCapacityThre RO The number of times throughput was below shUnder threshold each day Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 12 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 9 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbbOduPerfMonEthDayHighTrafficThres RO The number of times actual traffic was above hExceed threshold each day wbbOduPerfMonTdmCurrTable N A This table defines keeps the TDM counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonTdmCurrEntry N A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonTdmCurrActiveSeconds RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM serv
135. ble Local connection direct connection to the IDU without using an IP address Network connection through a LAN IP Address Log on IP address 5 Normally encrypted link Encryption indicator Link password validation failed The link is encrypted with default keys Service and configuration are unavailable Change the link password Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 6 8 Overview Chapter 7 Configuring the Link This chapter describes the link configuration procedure which is performed after the installation of both sides of the Wireless Link link as set out in 5 Link configuration uses a Link Configuration wizard to redefine the configu ration parameters and fine tune an operational link Both sides of the link are configured simultaneously Link configuration allows you to configure link parameters which do not lead to sync loss or require a reset Some may change service performance in respect of which warnings are displayed For ease of use the Link Configuration wizard follows the same pattern as Link Installation You should therefore be familiar with the content of 5 The following parameters are configured using the Link Configuration Wiz ard e System parameters e Channel settings e Transmission power and antenna settings e Service parameters The Configuration Wizard has seven steps as shown in Table 7 1 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 1 Overview
136. ble connectors are at the bottom If they are on top water may penetrate into the unit causing damage 3 Refer to Appendix A for detailed ODU mounting kit contents and sche matics E Do not tighten the ODU to its mounting brackets until the alignment process of the antenna is complete ote Ensure that there are no direct obstructions in front of the ODU or interference from man made obstacles Mounting external antennas If you are using ODU with an integrated antenna skip to Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 8 Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices Chapter 3 The supplied mounting kit is used to mount the antenna onto a pole The antennas must be aligned for maximum throughput Do not stand in front of a live antenna Warning gt To mount an external antenna 1 To mount an external antenna ensure that the antenna is properly grounded and then mount the antenna onto the pole Refer to Appen dix A for detailed antenna mounting instructions 2 Follow the mounting instructions supplied with the antenna Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements The Wireless Link ODU is designed with surge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes GE MDS recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the equipment from nearby lig
137. blue background is split into three sub panes If you click Site A or Site B in the tool bar you will be offered another win dow which in turn displays on of several panels depending on which func tion you choose J Site Configuration File Actions Help Backup System Management Q Air Interface Network Parameters LAN 2 Hub Site Sync P Management Inventory Security Default Gateway o 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Date amp Time Advanced sk Ethernet BB TDM Services 2X External Alarms Operations Figure 1 26 Site Configuration window with open Management panel Viewing and Printing This manual is optimized for viewing online as a PDF file To this end it uses an 11 point Tahoma typeface for main text Tables for most part use 8 point fonts Here are a few pointers for hard copy printing e The text and table typefaces used are large enough to print the manual at two pages per sheet Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 18 Viewing and Printing Chapter 1 e For good legibility use a commercial grade laser printer A color printer is of course best however a monochrome printer set to use gray scale gives acceptable results e Better quality inkjet printers also give good output Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Chapter 2 Site Preparation Planning the Link Site Overview Link site planning consists of a s
138. carried out from either sit Configuration wizard as shown in Chapter 7 Q DFS Encrypted Link e using the E Both sites in a FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link must be configured Note identically The only difference is in the Channel Settings window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Configuration Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization Q Operating Channel GHz Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 Automatic Channel Selection Available Channels List GHz M 5 485 5 500 5 515 M 5 530 5 490 5 505 5520 M 5535 M 5 495 5 510 5525 V 5 540 FI ra 2 5 545 5 550 5 555 Appendix J C 5 560 5 565 5 570 A Reselect Channel Select All Clear All Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dBm Figure J 5 Channel Select dialog box ACS permanently enabled ACS cannot be disabled HIE Upon completion of the wizard the Site configuration dialogs can be used in the usual way Once operational the Link Manager window is the same as for other radio equipment models Here is the Link Manager main window upon completion of the wizard Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Configuration Appendix J Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help vg eg 9 Link Configuration Link In atio ite Get Diagnostics
139. cateversvacsansessavereriwinneca F 1 Upgrading an Installed Ag ed ee see tee F 1 Appendix G AIND Alignment Expected Signal Level for AIND radios cu ce dns enereunniee sites entries G 1 Performing Wireless Link AIND Alignment societe G 2 Eg ipment Setup semestre a a a a ae kr G 2 Alanna IC amenna agane oa a EE EAEE ESN G 2 Contguring the MAK aieri cinadan aiai G 3 Val eating me Aea enaar Aa E A ATA AD G 3 Touch G 3 Appendix H Hub Site Synchronization What ie Hub Site SCO RON nantes H 1 Pe ee IS aint er A H 3 ODUVHSS Un Connection FINOT se fausses sake Rinne H 4 Radio Frame Parem PO coment H 4 Wireless Mux Consideration S sssini ina aaben H 5 Wireless Link CORSIQCLAUOMNS vssscaciscsiiavenstinesdscandsevecstaneederedesstavavekdavedesesansieute s H 5 HSS Link Configuration EE H 6 See REE H 8 Appendix I BRS Installation Procedure EE Eg RR ER RENE I 1 EEE JET RE ere 1 3 Appendix J FCC IC DFS Installation Procedure POG S 45 3 GHz Links EN OU erresiren J 1 FEE ER EE J 1 JERNET DEE AE COO inersia J 4 Appendix K Monitored Hot Standby Installation Procedure What is a Monitored Hot Standby Le del s da danser sante s niutus K 1 What MHS provides iins AAO ERE K 2 Equipment PIOLECHON ciso a a aa a EE K 2 Alr Intenace Protectio iwiiissra ninani EE NN EEL R K 2 Purpose of this Appendix ET K 3 Who Should Read EE K 3 AEE RR K 3 Installing Mann ennemi las K 3 Maintaming a MAS DR casseria aan a Eiaa K 10 IDU REPIACEIICNE ie Len nd avs disveduc
140. cation receive Figure H 1 shows interference caused by non synchronized collocated units Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 H 1 What is Hub Site Synchronization Appendix H Figure H 1 Interference caused by collocated units Figure H 2 Collocated units using Hub Site Synchronization 1 Figure H 3 Collocated units using Hub Site Synchronization 2 The units are connected to each other with HSS cables and HSS Distribution Units One of the radios in the site is defined as HSS Master and generates syn chronization pulses The other collocated radios in the site the HSS Clients are connected to the HSS Master and synchronize their transmission to the pulses An HSS Client can be configured to work in one of two modes Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 H 2 Hardware Installation Appendix H e HSS Client Continue Transmission HSC CT If the unit loses synchronization with the HSS Master the link remains active How ever without synchronization pulses it is possible that this unit will cause interference e HSS Client Disable Transmission HSC DT If the unit loses synchronization with the HSS Master the link is dropped until the synchronization pulses resume This setting prevents the unit from causing interference The remote ODUs that are not located at the hub site are called Indepen dent Units and do not require HSS hardware Hardware Installation HSS supports installation of up to sixteen
141. cepts only encrypted values wbbOduReadWriteCommunity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 16 DisplayString RW Read Write Community String This parameter always returns when retrieving its value It is used by the Manager application to change the Read Write Community String The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values wbbOduTrapCommunity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 17 DisplayString RW Trap Community String This parameter is used by the Manager application to change the Trap Community String The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values wbbOduAdmSnmpAgentVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 18 Integer RO Major version of the SNMP agent wbbOduAdmRemoteSiteName 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 19 DisplayString RO Remote site name Returns the same value as sysLocation parameter of the remote site wbbOduAdmSnmpAgentMinorVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 20 Integer RO Minor version of the SNMP agent Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 5 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 2 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbbOduAdmLinkPassword 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 21 DisplayString RW Link Password This parameter always returns when retrieving its value lt is used by
142. chanical ODU with Integrated Antenna 30 5 12 00 W x 30 5 12 00 H x 5 8 2 28 D cm in 1 5 kg 3 3 lbs ODU Connectorized 13 5 5 3 W x 24 5 9 6 H x 4 1 5 D cm in 1 0 kg 2 2 Dimensions Ibs IDU C 43 6 17 1 W x 21 8 2 H x 4 4 1 7 D cm in 1 5kg 3 3lbs IDU E 22 0 8 6 W x 4 4 1 7 H x 17 6 6 D cm 0 5 kg 1 1 Ibs Power Power Feeding Dual feeding 20 to 60 VDC AC DC converter is available Power Consumption lt 20 W IDU ODU Environmental Operating Temperatures ODU 35 C to 60 C 319F to 140 F IDU 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F Humidity ODU Up to 100 non condensing IP67 IDU 90 non condensing Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 N 3 Safety Appendix N Safety ODU IDU UL 60950 1 UL 60950 22 CAN CSA i FCC IC cTUVus C22 2 60950 1 CAN CSA C22 2 pened Ty CAN CSA C222 60950 22 ETSI IEC EN IEC 60950 1 EN IEC 60950 22 EN IEC 60950 1 FCC 47 CFR Class B Part15 Subpart B ETSI EN 300 386 EN 301 489 1 EN 301 489 4 ICAN CSA CEI IEC CISPR 22 02 AS NZS CISPR 22 2006 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 N 4 Antenna Characteristics Appendix N Antenna Characteristics An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio sig nal in the form of RF power is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa The transmission range is a function of the antenna gain and
143. ck the Forgot Commu nity button and enter the Alternative Community key Figure 8 9 Then change the read write Community string Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 9 Link Lock Security Feature Chapter 8 Alternative Community Alternative Community The Alternative Read Write Community is supplied with the product It may also be obtained via Customer Support Please have the unit s Serial Number and or MAC Address ready when requesting an Alternative Read Write Community Enter the Alternative Read Write Community Figure 8 9 Alternative Community Dialog box Link Lock Security Feature Link Lock is a part of a security concept intended to meet a form of abuse encountered in the field It is designed to prevent the situation where a remote ODU can be stolen and used as a pirate link to steal services or information The Link Lock feature actually locks the local ODU to be synchronized ONLY to specific remote ODU It is a site oriented feature The lock can only be set from a live link It is based on MAC authentication and is site oriented and activated on a per ODU basis For example if you lock the Site B ODU to the Site A ODU you must still lock the Site A ODU to the Site B ODU to ensure complete two way locking Link Lock can only be removed when the link is unsynchronized In such a case an alarm is raised by the Link Manager gt To enable Link Lock 1 Click Site A on the mai
144. correct air parameters inconsistency you must reconfigure each of the ODUs e Common practice is to configure the remote site first and then to configure the local site e For some of the configuration parameters additional action must be taken before the new value is loaded Please refer to the operation in the parameters description e Some of the MIB parameters values are product dependent It is strongly recommend using the Link Manager Application for chang ing these values Setting wrong values may cause indeterminate results Community String To control a link all SNMP requests should go to the local site IP address See Table 4 4 for default Community strings Private MIB Structure The sections in the private MIB and its location in the MIB tree are shown in Figure Q 1 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 2 MIB Parameters Appendix Q B private B enterprises B wilinks 2 wbb S O wbbOdu O wbbOdu dmin O wbbOduService O wbbOduEthernet OJ wbbOduBridge O wbbOdu ir O wbbOduPerfMon O wbbOdu gent wbbIdu O wbbIduAdmin O wbblduService OJ wbbIduEthernet OJ wbbIduBridge OJ wbbIduTdm H wbbGeneral CH wilinksProducts m eeaeee AEE ae Figure Q 1 Top Level Sections of the private MIB The products MIB section contains the definition of the Object IDs for the two form factors of the ODU Integrated Antenna and Connectorized referred in the MIB as external antenna O wilinks H wbb 9 wilinksProdu
145. crew hex head M8x40 Washer flat M8 Washer spring M8 Nut M8 Base wall AARUN ANNAN STEP 1 Attach item 1 to the base mate knurled surfaces using items 2 3 4 5 as shown Use tightening torque of 24 N m Attach item 6 to the arm mate knurled surfaces using items 2 3 4 5 as shown Use tightening torque of 24 N m Install ant to wall hardware supplied by customer MAL TT ODU Figure A 5 Mounting on Wall Mounting an External Antenna Optional external antennas can be mounted on a pole The external mount ing kit varies according to the specific antenna model Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 A 3 Appendix B Link Budget Calculator Overview The Link Budget Calculator is a utility for calculating the expected perfor mance of the Wireless Link wireless link and the possible configurations for a specific link range The utility allows you to calculate the expected RSS of the link and find the type of services and their effective throughput as a function of the link range and deployment conditions User Input You are required to enter or choose the following parameters Depending on the product some of the parameters have a default value that cannot be changed Band which determines frequency and regulation Channel Bandwidth fixed to 20 MHz for Wireless Link Tx Power maximum Tx power per modulation is validated Antenna Type cannot be change
146. cription Channel scanning in progress incompatiblePartner 16 critical Indicates that configuration problem was detected and that link installation is required in order to fix it Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Configuration problem detected Link installation required timeClockSet 17 normal Indicates that the ODU time clock was set Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description The time was set to p p Is the date and time configurationChanged 18 normal Indicates that the ODU recovered from an error but there are configuration changes Contains two parameters 1 Description Configuration changed Error code is n 2 n number Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 19 Trap Parameters Table Q 3 MIB Traps Sheet 2 of 4 Appendix Q Name Severity Description hssOpStateChangedToINU 19 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to INU type Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS operating state was changed to INU hssOpStateChangedToHSM 20 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to HSM type Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS operating state was changed to HSM hssOpStateChangedToHSC 21 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to HSC type Contains a single par
147. cts S O wbbFamily odu odulntegrated ntenna oduExternal ntenna HS wbbBFamily The ODU MIB contains the sections Admin Service Ethernet Bridge Air PerfMon and Agent The IDU MIB contains the sections Admin Service Ethernet Bridge and TDM The general MIB include a single generic parameter that is used by all traps as a trap description parameter MIB Parameters The following section describes all of the MIB parameters The MIB parame ters follow the following naming convention lt wbb gt lt Section 1 gt lt Section n gt lt Parameter Name gt For each of the configuration and control parameters parameters with read write access the Description column describes when the new value is effective It is recommended that you perform the appropriate action to make the values affective immediately after any change Where a change is Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 3 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Appendix Q required on both sides of the link it is recommended that you change both sides of the link first and then perform the action Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Table Q 1 Supported RFC 1213 Variables Name OID Type Description iflndex 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 152 Integer O ssa92y R A unique value for each interface lts value ranges between 1 and the value of ifNumber The value for each interface must remain constant at least from one re i
148. d for ODU with integrated antenna Antenna Gain per site cannot be changed for integrated antenna Cable Loss per site cannot be changed for integrated antenna Required Fade Margin Rate and Adaptive check box Service Type Required Range Link Budget Calculator Internal Data For each product or Regulation and Band the calculator stores the follow ing data required for link budget calculations Maximum Transmit power per modulation Receiver Sensitivity per modulation for Ethernet service and for TDM services at various BER Maximum linear input power used to calculate minimum distance Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 1 Calculations Appendix B e Antenna gain and cable loss for ODU with integrated antenna e Available Channel Bandwidths Calculations EIRP EIRP TxPower AntennaGains 4 CableLosss e4 Expected RSS and Fade Margin ExpectedRSS EIRP PathLoss AntennaGains 8 CableLossg jep where Site A is the transmitting site Site B is the receiving site PathLoss is calculated according to the free space model PathLoss 32 45 20 x log ip Frequency myz 20 x log RequiredRangex ExpectedFadeMargin ExpectedRSS Sensitivity where Sensitivity is dependent on air rate Min and Max Range MinRange is the shortest range for which ExpectedRSS lt MaxInputPower per air rate MaxRange with Adaptive checked is the largest range for which ExpectedRSS gt Sensitivity at t
149. d this port For further detail see this web site Device unreachable Error Check connectivity to ODU Connected to lt site_name gt Information lt site_name gt Site will be reset Information Restore Factory Default Settings in process on Site lt site_name gt Information Factory Settings The process was not finished due to connection Warning Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem issues to ODU Reset The process was not finished due to connection issues Warning Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem to target ODU will not be reset Cannot Write to Monitor file There is not enough space on the disk Warning Free some space on disk on the managing computer and retry Windows Error lt error_ID gt Cannot Write to Monitor file Warning Operating System error on the managing computer TDM Counters were cleared for both sides Information Identical IP addresses at lt local_site_name gt and Warning Set up a different IP to each site lt remote_site_name gt The Product is not identified at the lt local_site_name gt site Warning Link Manager is incompatible with the ODU software version The Product is not identified at the lt remote_site_name gt site Warning The Product is not identified at both sites Warning Product Not Identified Warning The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the Warning ODU release is newer than Link Manager release lt remote_site_name gt site Wizards are not availabl
150. d upon each change in the wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTable either an addition or removal of an entry wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTable N A This table includes the currently active alarms When a RAISED trap is sent wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmEntry N A Entry containing the details of a currently RAISED trap INDEX wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmCounter wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmCounter 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 1 Integer RO A running counter of active alarms The counter is incremented for every new RAISED trap It is cleared after a device reset wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmSeverity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 2 Integer RO Current Alarm severity wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmid 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 3 Integer RO Unique Alarm Identifier combines alarm type and interface The same Alarmld is used for RAISED and CLEARED alarms wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmifindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 4 Integer RO Interface Index where the alarm occurred Alarms that are not associated with a specific interface will have the following value 65535 wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmUnit 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 5 Integer RO Unit associated with the alarm wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTrapID 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 6 Integer RO ID of the raised trap that was sent when this alarm was raised wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTimeT 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 7 Integer RO Timestamp of this alarm This number is in seconds from Midnight January 1st wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmText 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 8
151. de Network IP Address 10 105 1 2 WBB Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure K 8 Primary link a few seconds before regular No Link display It will then revert to the standard No Link available window On the secondary link Manager window you will see a window like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 9 Maintaining an MHS Link Appendix K Link Manager 10 105 2 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help Le x amp g Link Configuration Site 2 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Location 22 2 4 LinkID Setup 2 Radio Interface Services 2xE1 Ethernet 5 F RSS dem Frequency GHz 5 490 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate IP Address 10 105 2 2 TOM Service Secondary Link Active Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 7 7 ae Estimated Time Between Errors 3 Trap Destination 10 105 2 21 or Blocks gt J Site 2 4 E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 11 Frequency 5 490 GHz l Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000038 3 30 2009 10 38 21 AM TDM Service has been closed The reason is Sync Lost ODU 000057 3 30 2009 10 43 52 AM TDM Service has been closed The reason is Sync Lost ODU 000052 3 30 2009 10 40 58 AM The time was set to MON MAR 30 09 40 58 2009 O
152. deber leet VE 1etdeber sl mibgeer NE cme Comer Astes bos site b l stk peer price 1 34 dal vinner Der r te VEC pour Peeve fopin gerie fej i n n ee euwe eee eo hanches la pace 4 gt bate progres lar fre maleren er atinentes puces N E comme Fyn rer ve craie de var nye de D Pom YY xe xe Server l antenne da pone on Uli pet la plece 6 Les sisses ot rondelles 7 2 4 cowe indique Wtliser on couple de serrage de 24 im POUR PLONE VIN dn x x x2 x b oo L _ 0000 Figure T 4 Montage sur un pyl ne Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 T 4 Montage sur un mur Appendix T Montage sur un mur TN Kit d installation UDU MECE DESCAPTION OUANNTE hes tote ME 242 D rondelles plater M amp rondelles elevtiques ME 2 S etree MS 2 6 bise L ETAPE 1 ce Attacher la pl ce 1 la base rep x rer les surfaces moletees en O d 3 utilisant les pi ces 2 3 4 5 comme indiqu Utiliser un couple de 1 2 y 3 4 5 serrage de 24 Wim ondt opu i ag ETAPE 2 xe Attacher la piece 6 au bras reperer les Va O A p surfaces molet es en utilisant les pi ces 2 Y 3 4 5 comme indiqu Utiliser un couple de 6 2 3 4 5 serrage de 24 Nim S W7 ETAPE 3 installer l antenne sur le mur mat riel fourni par le cent lu ODU Figure T 5 Montage sur un mur Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 T 5 Montage d une antenne
153. dntantexdasssucdedenet vices N A EEEE AE K 10 ODU Replacement sescenti EEEE it K 11 Monkormo Me LAKS caancinasntscsmanassanntoverenccaiamesnntncnnnaminnsiadekiuarmaniiuangeannenuses K 12 SWEM LOGIE RE K 13 Switching from Primary Link to Secondary Like K 13 Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary LINK RL K 14 System Operation description sxrarennrnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene K 16 Appendix L Cascaded Links Eee Me 0 LS nds L 1 Installing Cascaded RS nest ends dine L 1 Appendix M Video Surveillance Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 About the Video Surveillance Product ccccceccececceeeecescececeueuseusesaesauauseueesanes M 1 eter eg EE REE A EE ETE M 1 Part 3 Technical Information Appendix N Technical Specifications 1 RNET RE N 1 GE nine nie entente N 2 TOM INE G RER Re N 2 Ethernet IME aCe Sinusite E EEES N 3 ET 0 REE N 3 8 1 RE RE EEE EE ENE N 3 POWOD sjur r tenana R Ea ker ed kai GR EN N 3 annales N 3 hammam toi N 4 I RR ERE REN N 4 Antenna ERE NE N 5 Appendix O Wiring Specifications EG RE EE O 1 User Forn Connector EE EE nes eee ire O 1 LAN 0 en aenauee anneau O 1 LAN POM tor POEB ee neenm sente nanas ete annegnen gd este teen tres O 2 OPOE 10 PELAN Cable ies ce svesusaan cccecevaumecances a EE E ee sites O 2 TUNK Ports EL TT RAS COMME eironi eiai E Ei O 2 Hot Standby POERI Lunnan daa kassen a Ove steam ana ine 0 2 IDU all models Alarm Connector s rxsxxaxrannnnnnnnvnnnn
154. dssutasasucasaseuateanasssddudsatrestesandaazaNs 3 10 Mounmg the TDU EEE EE tes 3 10 Connecting power to he LDU assisas a Nai 3 13 Connecting the ODU 10 ME TDU aeria A AE 3 14 Installing Link using POE Devices sorna en nanens ren enken 3 14 Connecting User Equipment s rvannnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 3 14 Connecting and Aligning ODUs Antennas rrannvvnrnnnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnennnnnnnr 3 15 Chapter 4 Getting Started with the Link Manager Installing the Link Manager Application masmaisneamnaeieenmeekne naa 4 1 Minimum System REGUITCINCINS ss ccccisvscsvsvsetcncscnsvsvevsercucconsveveveveendsexsvevexexeens 4 1 Installing the Sotware aise ram n ter cases sen R benene EE oia eien aie ete e nas 4 1 Getting Started with the Link MAR 4 2 The Link Manager logon GREEN srisirssnninsisin innana 4 3 LOJON EoGmemeasmenemnu EAEEREN AABAA 4 6 Unsupported DEVICE sxedcsavennenceswohcsaddainenascves coadenmanneivencestesusaweatuestatenesnaessias 4 6 Incorrect IP AddrESS siosana anei a EE Eaa 4 6 Incorrect PASSWOIG asiasana aeaa EE A EE E DE EAE EO EE 4 7 DE ETE Ea RE 4 7 Changing he Log On PASSWOIG ereinen iiiaae EAEE AE 4 7 1 10 RR en EE E A P E aa 4 8 Default SCUINGS EE EE A AAE tete A A E een HE ME 4 10 Chapter 5 Installing the Link OWENE kanpaina a neue A E A E AAA 5 1 DEE ER M 5 3 TILT N en E E 5 3 Step 2 System FEN sc masmeunmenmaumahonEEnasntienusoss 5 3 EE TE S PP RER 5 6 Step 4 Hub Site Synchronization
155. e wbbOduBridgeBasePortEntry N A ODU Bridge Ports table entry INDEX wbbOduBridgeBasePortindex wbbOduBridgeBasePortindex RO ODU Bridge Port Number wbbOduBridgeBaselflndex RO Iflndex corresponding to ODU Bridge port wbbOduBridgeTpMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 101 Integer RW ODU bridge mode A change is effective after reset Valid values hubMode 0 wbbOduBridgeTpPortTable N A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table wbbOduBridgeTpPortEntry N A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table entry INDEX wbbOduBridgeTpPortindex wbbOduBridgeTpPortindex RO ODU Transparent Bridge Port Number Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 6 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 3 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbbOduBridgeTpPortinFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 3 1 3 Counter RO Number of frames received by this port wbbOduBridgeTpPortOutFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 3 1 4 Counter RO Number of frames transmitted by this port wbbOduBridgeTpPortInBytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 3 1 1 Counter RO Number of bytes received by this port 01 wbbOduBridgeTpPortOutBytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 3 1 1 Counter RO Number of bytes transmitted by this port 02 wbbOduAirFreq 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 1 Integer RW Installation Center Frequency Valid values are product de
156. e Ethernet port one ODU port and a standard 3 pin male AC power socket Figure 1 17 Basic PoE device showing the radio Ethernet port Outdoor PoE Device OPoE The OPoE is similar to the PoE device with weatherproof cas ing and sealed connectors that enables outdoor connectivity a special mounting kit is supplied for attachment to a mast Figure 1 18 O PoE device Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 11 Antennas Chapter 1 PoE 8 The PoE 8 is a 19 inch 1U metal unit providing 8 Ethernet ports enabling connection to collocated Ethernet applications The PoE 8 interfaces with Wireless Link ODU units to provide high quality network connectivity and power Figure 1 19 PoE 8 Unit Antennas An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio sig nal in the form of RF power is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa The antenna gain and transmitting power may be limited by country regula tions The Wireless Link may be operated with an integrated antenna that is part of the ODU unit or with external antennas connected to the ODU via N type connectors All cables and connections must be connected correctly to reduce RF losses The required antenna impedance is 50Q The 5 x GHz Integrated Antenna ODU is provided with 330 mm 1ft flat panel antenna with a gain of 22dBi 5 x GHz 17dBi 4 9 GHz and 9 beam width The 2 x GHz Integrated Antenna ODU is provided with 330 mm 1ft flat
157. e Link Manager will be used just for monitoring Upgrade the Link Manager You will get this message as a pop up The Manager identified a newer ODU release at both sites Warning The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the Warning lt local_site_name gt site Newer Version identified at the lt local_site_name gt site Warning ODU release is newer than Link Manager release Wizards are not available Link Manager will be used just for monitoring Upgrade the Link Manager Newer Version identified at the lt remote_site_name gt site Warning Newer Version Identified Warning Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 15 Setting the Events Preferences Chapter 9 Setting the Events Preferences You can define a color for the messages to be displayed in the Event Log window according to the severity of the event The severity is predefined gt To set the Message color 1 From the Tools menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog box appears 2 Click the Events Tab amp Preferences Monitor Events Advanced Event Priority Event Color Critical Severe Major Minor Warning Normal LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ Info Reset Settings Background Color Events Log File File C d My Documents E ventsLog tst IL OK Cancel Figure 9 16 Preferences dialog box Event tab 3 Select the event type and click on the El button A color chart opens 4 Select the required color 5 Repe
158. e Link Installation Wizard Services 3xE1 Ethernet Channel GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Link ID EBG 29561334 To close this wizard click Done Monitor Link Radio Interface B RSS dem Figure 5 19 Installation Wizard Exit Summary Click Done to return to the main window The main window now reflects the installation Release 1 9 5 17 Wireless Link User Manual Installation Link Manager File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help Ef Link ID EBG 29561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Link TPSF_BTT IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 2 Connection Available x y Link Configuration Link Installation Fe Site 192 168 2 101 Operator A Get Diagnostics Chapter 5 amp Clear Counters Location Radio Interface RSS dBm Ethernet Service Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Rate Tx Rate Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks E1 Ports Events Log Number a Date amp Time Message Frequency 5 780 GHz Trap Source IP Address Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 5 20 Main window of the Manager after installat
159. e link installation including the remaining part of the IDU installation and connection to the ODU proceeds as described as above Mounting the IDU C The Wireless Link IDU Cs are all rack mountable as shown in Figure 3 13 A front panel keyed schematic of a rack mounted IDU C is shown in the fig ure below K Detachable F C 2 LAN M G Primary 3 F K Detachable Rack mounting L 0 4 8 or 16 Trunks E1 T1 Standby pin Power Label Rack mounting brackets Label Ports Port Connector abel brackets He fo foot GQ Cy J 19 Rack A B D SFP H Secondary J 19 Rack mounting Indicator ODU Port E Alarms Port 3 pin Power Fade mounting holes LEDs Port Connector holes Figure 3 13 IDU C front panel In Figure 3 14 we display a perspective view of the IDU C Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 10 Mounting the IDU C Chapter 3 Figure 3 14 IDU C A perspective view Further description of the keyed items in Figure 3 13 is shown in Table 3 1 below Table 3 1 Components of an IDU C front panel A Indicator LEDs See Figure 3 15 B ODU Port RJ 45 connector see Table K 1 C LAN RJ45Ports Ethernet RJ 45 connector see Table K 2 D LAN SFP Port See Appendix L E Alarm Ports Standard DB25 female connector see Table K 6 F Label indent Place for adhesive identification labels G Primary 3 pin Power Connector Standard 3 pins in line power connector see Table K 7 H Secondary 3 pin Power Connector
160. e the Link Password at on s s Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link externalAlarminPort1 Alarm 105 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port 1 Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 1 lt User Text gt Alarm externalAlarminPort2Alarm 106 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port 2 Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 2 lt User Text gt Alarm bitFailedAlarm 107 critical The trap is sent if there is no way to recover from the situation Contains two parameters 1 Description ODU power up built in test failed Error code is n2 n number wrongConfigurationLoadedAlarm 108 major The trap is sent if there is a way to recover from the situation Contains two parameters 1 Description Wrong configuration loaded Error code is n2 n number lanPort1DisconnectedAlarm 109 major Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected lanPort2DisconnectedAlarm 110 major Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected
161. e the alignment is complete you will be able to evaluate the quality of the link Site Figure G 1 Wireless Link Link Setup Expected Signal Level for AIND radios Use the Link Budget Calculator utility supplied on the Link Manager Soft ware CD ROM to calculate the expected performance of the Wireless Link wireless link The utility allows you to determine the RSS of the link and number of E1 T1 services available at a specified distance In all indoor type Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 G 1 Performing Wireless Link AIND Alignment Appendix G installations a long transmission line RF cable between the radio and antenna will be used oftentimes over 30 m 100 ft In this case the atten uation RF loss of the cable must be determined for both sides and entered as a dB loss in the Link Budget calculator In many cases a larger antenna is necessary to compensate for this transmission line loss Andrew LDF and AVA cables are good for minimizing loss Performing Wireless Link AIND Alignment The supervisor of the antenna alignment should be located at Site A with a Spectrum Analyzer Equipment Setup gt To set up the antenna alignment equipment 1 Coarsely align the two antennas Use the compass readings taken during the Site Survey to point the antennas in the correct direction 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure G 1 but connect a spectrum analyzer in place of the remote Wireless Link AIND
162. e the same software version You can see this on the inventory panels for each site For Site A click Site A Inventory and note the ODU software version Repeat this for Site B using Site B Inventory If either ODU has an old software version perform a software upgrade It is important to configure the new ODU exactly the same as the old ODU to avoid configuration mismatches which will disrupt the link An ODU may be reconfigured in several ways e Use the backup configuration If a backup of the configuration is available restore that configuration using Site A Restore e Manual configuration The new ODU can be configured manually according to the link configuration Remember to use the same settings for Link ID channels link password IP addresses and names Restoring Factory Setup gt To restore factory setup e Use Site Configuration A or B and then Operations Restore Defaults Always restore the over the air site B first Online Help Online help can be accessed from the Help menu on the main window of the Link Manager Customer Support Customer support for this product can be obtained from the local VAR Inte grator or distributor from whom it was purchased For further information please contact the GE MDS distributor nearest to you or one of GE MDS offices worldwide Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 20 Wireless Link Part 2 Advanced Installation Broadband Wireless Transmi
163. e within 30 cm of the ODU Andrew Grounding Kit Figure 3 10 Typical Installation Diagram with external antenna The installation steps are detailed in the following sections Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 7 Outdoor installation Chapter 3 Outdoor installation Preparing the ODU before Deployment Each ODU must be pre loaded with an IP address This may be done prior to deployment in the field or on site using a Laptop computer The process is quite straight forward and described in Appendix D Mounting the ODU The ODU can be mounted on a pole or a wall In both installations the sup plied mounting kit is used to secure the ODU A mast sited ODU typically uses a pole attached to the mast HIE S A Wireless Link link operates in pairs of two ODUs with the same configura tion Both ODUs must be installed and the antennas aligned for maximum throughput Prior to connecting cables to the ODU the protective earth terminal screw of the ODU must be connected to an external protective ground conductor or to a grounded pole i e Only a qualified person using the proper safety equipment should Warning climb the antenna mast e Only qualified professional personnel should install or dismantle ODUs and masts gt To mount the ODU on a pole or a wall 1 Ensure that the ODU is properly grounded 2 Mount the ODU onto the pole or wall Ensure that the unit is oriented so that the ca
164. eRequired 116 major The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch and SW upgrade is required Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software versions mismatch Software upgrade required swVersionsincompatible 117 critical The trap is sent if SW versions are incompatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description SW Versions incompatible hssMultipleSourcesDetectedAlarm 118 major Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources were detected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS multiple sync sources were detected hssSyncToProperSourceStoppedAlarm 119 major Indicates that synchronization to a proper sync pulse source was stopped Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS sync pulse Down The reason is s s Is the reason for the sync down hssSyncPulseDetectedAlarm 120 major Indicates that HSS additional sync pulse was detected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS additional sync pulse was detected tdmBackupAlarm 121 major Indicates that the TDM backup link was activated Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM backup alarm backup link was activated linkLockUnauthorizedRemoteODU 122 major Indicates that the remote ODU is unauthorized Contains a single parameter which
165. econds Transmit Signal Level ed exceeded the TSL1 threshold per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayBBERThresh1Ex RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio ceed exceeded the BBER1 threshold per Day wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrTable N A This table defines keeps the ethernet counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrEntry N A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrRxMBytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 7 1 1 Gauge RO Current RX Mega Bytes starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrTxMBytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 7 1 2 Gauge RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrEthCapacityThre RO The number of times throughput was below shUnder threshold in the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrHighTrafficThres RO The number of times actual traffic was above hExceed threshold in the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalTable N A This table defines keeps the ethernet counters of the last day in resolution of 15 min intervals wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalEntry N A This is an entry in the Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalldx RO This table is indexed per interval number Each intervalis of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalRxMBytes RO Current RX Mega Bytes per interval wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalTxMBytes RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval w
166. een Errors Trap Destination 10 105 2 21 Error Blocks J Site 2 4 E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 11 Frequency 5 490 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000038 3 30 2009 10 38 21 AM TDM Service has been closed The reason is Sync Lost ODU 000057 3 30 2009 10 43 52 AM TDM Service has been closed The reason is Sync Lost ODU 000052 3 30 2009 10 40 58 AM The time was set to MON MAR 30 09 40 58 2009 ODU 000042 3 30 2009 10 40 05 AM Transmitting on channel 5 270 GHz ODU 000023 3 30 2009 10 37 35 AM Transmitting on channel 5 280 GHz ODU 000040 3 30 2009 10 38 26 AM Transmitting on channel 5 280 GHz ODU lt M S Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 2 2 WBB Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure K 11 Secondary link operating after the switch over to secondary After a few moments the TDM icons become green Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link Switching back from the secondary link to the primary link will occur after the primary link has become and remains fully functional for a continuous period of at least one second Following reversion from the secondary link to the primary link the Manager main windows should look like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 14 Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link Appendix K Link Manager 10 105 1 2 Operator File Configuratio
167. een both ODUs rela tive to north 6 If there are obstructions between the two sites calculate the Fresnel Zone see Appendix B for details 7 If the site chosen does not meet requirements consider alternative sites Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 2 2 Stage 2 Physical Survey Chapter 2 8 Use the Link Budget Calculator on the CD supplied with the equipment or using the Link Manager to determine the expected performance Stage 2 Physical Survey The physical site survey reviews the environment of the proposed installa tion location to ensure that the link sites are suitable for the wireless net work The results of the physical site survey should be recorded E It is advisable to go on a clear day so you can more easily see any Noe obstructions between the two sites ote gt To perform a physical survey 1 From the compass readings taken in the preliminary survey find the azi muth horizontal position that the ODU should face towards the second ODU 2 Using binoculars locate any obstructions such as tall trees high build ings hills or mountains Look for other RF towers between the two sites Mark the locations of the obstructions on the map 3 Determine the location for the ODU having regard for existing rooftop installations and tower space It should be above any obstructions con sidering the Fresnel zone see Appendix B 4 If you need to install the ODU on a tower make sure that
168. elease 1 9 K 1 What MHS provides Appendix K e Designed to provide redundancy and high reliability for carrier class operators e Optimized for high capacity links operating in license free bands e A comprehensive solution providing protection against both equip ment failure and loss of air interface by simple connectivity between a primary link and a secondary link The main service redundancy features of the MHS are e TDM service cut over from the primary to the secondary link is com pletely automatic e TDM service cut over time no more than 50 ms e Automatic restore to primary link as soon as it becomes available e Support for up to sixteen TDM channels for Wireless Mux and four TDM channels for Wireless Link MHS is supported between e two Wireless Mux links e two Wireless Link links e a Wireless Mux link and a Wireless Link link What MHS provides Equipment Protection Equipment protection is provided for the electrically active network ele ments ODU and IDU The primary IDU and the secondary IDU are connected by a cable to moni tor failure and to control protection switching Switching time is less than 50ms When connecting two Wireless Link links as 1 1 one dual polarization antenna can be shared by the primary link and the secondary link Air Interface Protection Air Interface protection is unique to GE MDS and is optimized for wireless links operating in license free bands The primary link and the
169. et onu C Port 1 C Port 2 sFP TDI 1st Trunk 2nd Trunk 3rd Trunk Interval Current O 15 Minutes Opaily Figure 9 12 Basic Performance Monitoring Report 2 Choose a report type from the left panel and click the Get Data toolbar button For example if you choose Site A Air and Current you will be offered a report looking like this Performance Monitoring Report File View Configuration Help gt 2 amp 4 Get Data Save Clear Thresholds Selection Pane Close In Date amp Time Min RSL MaxRSL RSLTh RSLTh Min TSL Max TSL TSL Th BBER UAS 17 06 2009 15 42 40 52 51 0 0 16 16 0 0 0 Air Performance Monitor A Current Report Figure 9 13 A typical Performance Monitoring Report You can click the Selection Pane icon to toggle the side panel on or off The other reports look similar Here is a detailed description of the reports and their fields Several performance data occurrences are collected for each of the inter faces ES SES and UAS as well as specific data per Interface type e g Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 10 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 Tx and Rx bytes for Ethernet For the Air Interface user defined thresholds data are collected Refer to Table 9 3 and Table 9 4 below Data is collected and selectively displayed based on three time intervals as selected by the Interval radio buttons e Current
170. et TxN Orange 2 O PoE to PC LAN Cable When connecting the O PoE ETH port cable directly to a PC a crossed LAN CAT 5e 4 twisted pair 24 AWG STP terminated with RJ 45 connectors on both ends must be used The pinout in Table O 3 applies here Trunk Ports E1 T1 RJ45 Connector The E1 T1 interfaces terminate in 8 pin RJ 45 connectors as shown in Table O 4 below Table O 4 Trunk Ports E1 T1 RJ45Pinout Transmit Data Tip TxTip 1 Transmit Data Ring TxRing 2 Receive Data Tip RxTip 4 Receive Data Ring RxRing 5 Hot Standby Port RJ 11 Table O 5 Hot Standby RJ 11 Port Pinout HSB out 1 HSB in 2 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 O 2 IDU all models Alarm Connector Appendix O Table O 5 Hot Standby RJ 11 Port Pinout Ground 3 Ground 4 IDU all models Alarm Connector The IDU Alarm interface is a 25 pin D type female connector Its pinout is listed in Table O 6 Table O 6 IDU Alarm Connector Dry Contact Input 1 Positive 14 Input 1 Negative 15 Input 2 Positive 16 Input 2 Negative 17 Input 3 Positive 18 Input 3 Negative 19 Input 4 Positive 20 Input 4 Negative 21 Output 1 Normally Open 1 Output 1 Common 2 Output 1 Normally Closed 3 Output 2 Normally Open 4 Output 2 Common 5 Output 2 Normally Closed 6 Output 3 Normally Open 7 Output 3 Common 8 Output 3 Normally Closed 9
171. et of surveys which must be carried out before any equipment is brought to the site If for some reason the out come of any of these surveys is negative site re location will need to be considered A Site Survey consists of three stages 1 Preliminary survey The proposed link is analyzed in the office using a topographic map 2 Physical survey The locations of the indoor and outdoor equipment are determined on site 3 Radio Frequency RF survey It is recommended that the installation area be scanned with a spectrum analyzer to identify RF interference so as to determine a clear channel for radio installation on site The Site Survey Introduction Wireless links must be planned before installation The designated installation site must be appraised to determine that the wireless system is able to operate efficiently and provide connectivity without signal degrada tion Wireless Link offers a wide operating frequency range A free frequency channel must be determined within the operating range for optimum per formance Recommended Equipment Stage 1 Preliminary Survey e Topological map of the area e Urban map of the area Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 2 1 Stage 1 Preliminary Survey Chapter 2 e Compass Stage 2 Physical Survey e 100 meter tape measure e Ohmmeter to check ground connection e Binoculars e Map e Digital camera e Paper pencil and a clipboard e GPS device optional e
172. externe Appendix T Montage d une antenne externe L antenne externe optionnelle peut tre mont e sur un pyl ne Contenu du kit de montage d une antenne externe Le kit de montage d une antenne externe comprend les pi ces suivantes Douze rondelles plates Huit rondelles lastiques Huit crous hex Quatre boulons Un support en U Un support pivotement Deux courroies de fixation en m tal gt Pour installer une antenne externe sur un pyl ne 1 Attacher le support en U l arri re de l antenne en utilisant quatre ron delles plates quatre rondelles lastiques et quatre crous hex 2 Attacher le support pivotement au support en U en utilisant huit ron delles plates quatre rondelles lastiques quatre crous hex et quatre boulons 3 Passer les deux courroies de fixation par les fentes verticales dans le sup port pivotement 4 Attacher l antenne au pyl ne en utilisant les deux courroies de fixation Ajuster l inclinaison n cessaire en utilisant l chelle angulaire et serrer tous les boulons et crous la position requise Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 T 6 Index A Beeper mute 8 21 ACS 5 6 8 22 muting and restoring 8 2 aging time ODU Bridge Mode 8 15 restore 8 21 AIND Bridge mode Telnet commands 8 23 Aligning the antenna G 2 BRS Configuring the Link G 3 Installation I 1 J 1 Equipment Setup G 2 Link Activation 1 1 Evaluating the Link G 3 AIND Alignment G 2 C Air Inter
173. face 1 14 1 14 a ND Changing link password 5 5 nn ces Specifications general N 1 Channel selecting 5 6 Active Clock configuration TDM 5 15 Community Strings summary 9 17 Changing 8 9 Connector 0 3 Editing 8 8 External specification R 1 Forgotten passwords 8 9 Alignment AIND G 2 MIB Q 2 Antennas f Read Only 8 8 Align with beeper 3 15 Read Write 8 8 Aligning 3 15 Trap 8 8 Buzzer signals a5 Configuration Parameters 8 3 Cable grounding C 1 ne Connecting 3 15 Configuring External Advanced 8 2 8 14 8 16 8 16 Mounting 38 Air Interface 8 2 Air interface 7 1 Package Contents 3 6 contact person 82 External Mounting A 3 Date and Time 8 2 n MiS ean tme 4 Application Ethernet settings 8 1 pp a pe l External alarms 8 1 roae ane ACCESS Frequency channel 7 1 Cellular Backhaul 1 2 HSS 8 1 Private Networks 1 4 Security 8 2 B Security settings 8 1 Service parameters 7 1 backup System 8 2 configuration file 8 2 System parameters 7 1 ODU replacement 9 20 System settings 8 1 Band TDM MHS status 8 1 and DFS E 5 Tx Power and antenna 8 1 Changing E 1 View Inventory 8 2 defaults E 3 BDU Package Contents 3 6 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Index 1 Connecting user equipment 5 6 Customer Support 9 20 D Date and time setting 8 2 8 12 DC Power terminal pinout O 4 O 4 DFS J 1 changing band for E 5 Configuration J 4 FCC IC DFS Installation Procedure J 1 Link Activation J 1 E E1 T1 connections Backup link 1 10 Environment
174. flnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 x Counter RO The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters ifinUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 x Counter RO The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol ifinNUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 12 x Counter RO The number of non unicast i e subnetwork broadcast or subnetwork multicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol ifinErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 14 x Counter RO The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 x Counter RO The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters ifOutUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 17 x Counter RO The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent ifOutNUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 18 x Counter RO The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a non unicast i e a Subnetwork broadcast or subnetwork multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent a x is the interface ID Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 MIB Parameters MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB
175. for each site individually The fol lowing functions are available from the left side of the dialog box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 1 Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site Chapter 8 Site Configuration File Actions Help ti gt Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off z Installation Mode System System q Q Air Interface Description wireless Link 22 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory ObjectlD 1 3 6 1 4 1 4458 20 2 1 2 Security Date amp Time Here Advanced ak Ethernet Contact John E TDM Services E External Alarms Location la I Operations Last Power Up 14 06 2009 14 29 11 Figure 8 1 Configuration Dialog Box Functions on the left of the dialog box System Edit the contact person and location details View the system details Air Interface View Link ID installation frequency channel bandwidth View HSS settings Management Configure the IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Trap Destination and VLAN Inventory View the hardware and software inventory product identification versions MAC address and serial number Security Change the Community Values and the Link Password Set Link Lock Date and Time Set the date and time of the link from an NTP servers or from the managing computer Advanced Choose Hub or Bridge ODU mode IDU aging time set the Ethernet ports configuration set max information rate TDM MHS status set the exte
176. ft Windows application following the user interface conventions of familiar Microsoft Windows programs We would describe the chain of menu commands indicated in the example of Figure 1 ager 192 168 1 101 Operator ieee Maintenance Help Performance Monitoring Report F ai Bi mik 25 like this 5 Active Alarms gt TA Recent Events 2B Tools Active Alarms 1 A Software Upgrade using Boldface for the menu Events Log gt ication labels and vertical bars to Preferences T separate them Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 17 Windows Terminology Chapter 1 Figure 1 25 Menu navigation in the Link Manager Similarly mouse click items will be referred to like this Click Next to continue A mouse click always uses the left mouse button unless stated otherwise Windows Terminology Look at Figure 1 1 above The main application display which you see con sists of a frame window with a menu bar system icons and content It will be referred to as a window the main window or the Manager window depending on context The top line of icons is the tool bar and provides part of the menu bar functionality with a mouse click At the bottom of the window is the status bar a line of icons and text boxes The central part of the main window consists of several panes On the right there are Radio Interference Ethernet Service and the Frequency panes The left hand pane with the
177. ge Alarm detected at the Site B interface or Local or Remote loopback SVC Red Alarm detected at the Site A interface off Ethernet only IDU or E1 T1 not configured Red HSS not operational due to improper signal detection This ODU is not transmitting Orange HSS is operational One of the following conditions apply e This ODU is a master that is generating signals and detecting signals e This ODU is a master that is generating signals but detected improper sig HSS nals e This ODU is a client Continue Tx but is not detecting signals e This ODU is a client Disable Tx and is detecting signals from multiple sources All orange cases transmit STBY Red MHS mode Primary Link state not active Orange MHS mode Secondary Link state active Use the following table to troubleshoot faults in the system Table 9 8 System Troubleshooting Ensure that power is connected to the IDU No power Ensure that the ODU cable is properly wired and connected Complete the installation procedure from the Link Manager No signal Check the antenna alignment Check that the radio configuration of both site A and site B units is the same channel and Link ID Weak signal Check the antenna alignment reconfigure the link received Check the alignment tone sounds the Best Signal sequence Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 19 Replacing an ODU Chapter 9 Replacing an ODU Prior to any action ensure that both ODUs hav
178. ges to the Channel field may result in a Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz Channel Bandwidth MHz Automatic Channel Selectids a Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dBm Figure 7 6 Channel frequency options Selecting one of the frequencies presented returns you to the status of Figure 7 5 with the appropriate change If you choose Other the fol lowing window opens Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in a Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz Other i Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 C Automatic Channel Selection Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 7 7 Choosing an Other Operating Channel frequency Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 7 Configuration Chapter 7 The right hand drop down list showing the current Operating Channel allows you to fine tune the frequency in increments of 5MHz within a range of the operating band which in this example is 5 740 5 835 GHz When you have completed making your choice click Next to continue Step 4 Hub Site Synchronization Settings Link Configuration Wizard Hub Site Synchronization Settings Settings for reducing mutual interference between multiple units at the Hub Site Synchronization Status Status B Operation Independent Unit Independent Unit Synchronization NJA NJA External Pulses Not Detected Not Detected Conf
179. ghput Mbps Rx Rate Tx Rate Rx Tx Rate Units O Mbps Fps ervice Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks E1 Ports Events Log Number Date amp Time IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 7 12 Main window of the manager after configuration Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 11 Chapter 8 Site Configuration The Site Configuration dialog panels are used to configure parameters which may differ between both sides of the link The parameters configured using the Site Configuration dialog panels include among others System settings Air interface Transmit Tx powerHub Site Synchronization status Network management including VLAN Inventory link hardware and software model details Security settings Date and time Ethernet service settings TDM Hot Standby status External alarms settings Operations Revert to factory settings The Operations dialog offers a doorway to jump into installation mode The Site Configuration dialog has its own main menu with the following extra functionality Backup configuration parameters Restore configuration from a previously backed up configuration file Refresh the current panel Enable disable the site ODU buzzer Jump back into installation mode keeping current configuration set tings Configuring the Site Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site You can edit the configuration parameters
180. guration Wizard System Fill in the attribute Fields below Link ID Link Name Site 1 Site 2 Link Password Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem EBG 29561334 TPSF_BTT Chapter 7 Figure 7 2 Configuration Wizard System dialog box The System attributes may be edited and the Link Password may be changed exactly as in the corresponding Link Installation step on page 5 9 Click Next to continue Step 3 Channel Settings Configuring the Channel Settings follows the same pattern as the Installa tion procedure Notice that you can change the channel bandwidth but it will of cause a re synchronization Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 4 Configuration Chapter 7 Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz Channel Bandwidth MHz CSS Automatic Channel Selection Available Channels List GHz 5 740 5 755 5 770 5 785 5 800 5 815 5 745 5 760 5 775 5 790 5 805 5 820 5 750 5 765 5 780 5 795 5 810 5 825 lt Reselect Channel Select All Clear All Monitor Link gt Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 7 3 Channel Settings dialog box Automatic Channel Selection Notice that the operating channel is grayed out If you use the Reselect Channel button to change it you will be asked for confirmation Link Configuration Wizard 9 4 Channel re se
181. h of 20 wbbOduAirCurrentRateldx 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 5 Integer RO Index of current air rate wbbOduAirTxPower36 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 10 Integer RW Deprecated parameter Actual behavior is read only wbbOduAirTxPower48 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 11 Integer RW Deprecated parameter Actual behavior is read only wbbOduAirCurrentTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 12 Integer RO Current Transmit Power in dBm This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation wbbOduAirMinFrequency 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 13 Integer RO Minimum center frequency in MHz wbbOduAirMaxFrequency 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 14 Integer RO Maximum center frequency in MHz wbbOduAirFreqResolution 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 15 Integer RO Center Frequency resolution Measured in MHz if value lt 100 wbbOduAirCurrentFreq 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 16 Integer RO Current Center Frequency Measured in MHz if center frequency resolution value lt 100 wbbOduAirNumberOfChannels 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 17 Integer RO Number of channels that can be used wbbOduAirChannelsTable N A Table of channels used by automatic channels selection ACS wbbOduAirChannelsEntry N A ACS channels table entry INDEX wbbOduAirChannelsindex wbbOduAirChannelsindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 1 Integer RO Channel Index wbbOduAirChannelsFrequency 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 2 Integer RO Channel frequency in MHz Wireles
182. he main component of the system The ODU connects to an antenna that enables radio communication and can be mounted on a pole or wall The ODU connects to the IDU via a CAT5e cable Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 6 The Outdoor Unit ODU Chapter 1 ODUs are available in different frequencies and regulations in the ranges 2 3 2 7GHz 4 9 6GHz The ODU comes in two different form factors as shown in Figure 1 8 below depending on the type of antenna e ODU with integrated 1ft flat panel antenna Integrated Antenna ODU This unit contains both the ODU and antenna as a single unit housed in a weatherproof casing e ODU with a connector for an external antenna Connectorized ODU The unit is fitted with an N type connector An external antenna can extend the range of the link and in some cases may help to reduce environmental interferences Front Rear O mee E TD o N en Oo OU o fo oH O o J Y Ce ox TD Q Dn oO pe 4 Er 7 Figure 1 8 ODU Form Factors e Integrated Antenna ODU This ODU has an integrated 370mm 1 2ft flat panel antenna The ODU contains both the radio and the antenna as a single unit housed in a weatherproof case e Connectorized ODU This ODU has one N type connector for connecting an external antenna There are four series of Wi
183. he highest air rate for which this relation ship is true In a link with adaptive rate this will be the actual behavior MaxRange for a given air rate is the largest range for which ExpectedRSS Sensitivity RequiredFadeMargin Service The Ethernet and configured TDM trunks throughput is calculated according to internal product algorithms Availability The Service Availability calculation is based on the Vigants Barnett method which predicts the downtime probability based on a climate factor C fac tor Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 2 Antenna Height Appendix B Availability 3 1 6X10 x Cfactor x frequency gy X RequiredRangexyp ExpectedFadeMargin x 10 9 Antenna Height The recommended antenna height required for line of sight is calculated as the sum the Fresnel zone height and the boresight height See About the Fresnel Zone below Using the notation of Figure B 1 below splitting ExpectedRange into dj dz the Fresnel zone height at distance d from the left hand antenna is given by 300 requencycu d d xd xd 0 6 x For the most conservative setting we take the mid point between the _ ExpectedRange antennas setting d d 5 300 FrpeotedRange frequency en 2 which gives 0 6 x Pl duencYgm I TET 2 2 simplifying to 0 52 x ExPectedRange frequency The boresight clearance height is calculated 2 FE tedR 72 aS IR Fapseredkange E where Ryan 636
184. he installation is carried out using the Installation wizard Its operation is detailed in the following pages in a tutorial style For the purpose of explanation we will set up a laboratory link with the fol lowing characteristics e Channel selection Automatic e Services Ethernet 3xE1 on ports 1 2 3 The Installation wizard has seven steps as shown in Table 5 1 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 1 Overview Table 5 1 Link Installation Wizard Chapter 5 nes d m 1 3 4 6 7 Wizard welcome System parameters Link ID Site details Channel settings ACS Configuration HSS Settings Services Types Adaptive or fixed Jitter Buffer MHS Set TDM Clock Parameters Wizard summary and completion Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 2 Installation Chapter 5 Installation Step 1 Start the Wizard In the tool bar of the Link Manager main window click the Link Installa tion button The Link Installation button is only accessible if the antennas are properly aligned If this box is grayed out you should align the anten nas as set out in 3 on page 3 17 The Installation Wizard opens Link Installation Wizard Welcome to the Link Installation Wizard This wizard is used for performing Link configuration updates After Changes made in Frequency field the Link will be resynchronized Note that all changes
185. htning strikes Refer to Appendix C for detailed installation instructions of lightning pro tection devices Outdoor Connections gt To complete the outdoor connections 1 Connect the ground cable to the ODU chassis as marked on the ODU 2 Connect the antenna cable to the ODU 3 Connect the lightning protection device to the ODU see Appendix C 4 Attach the ODU IDU cable to the ODU RJ 45 connector see Appendix K for the connector pinout 5 Screw in the cable glands to ensure hermetic sealing of the ODU 6 Secure the cables to the pole mast or brackets using UV rated cable ties Indoor Installation Installing IDU E and R units IDU E Installation The IDU E can be wall mounted placed on a desktop or take up one half of a iu rack slot The unit should be grounded cabled to the ODU and con nected to power using the supplied AC DC adapter Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 9 Mounting the IDU C Chapter 3 Figure 3 11 Typical IDU E Rear Panel IDU R Installation Cou LAN UNN ALARVS Figure 3 12 IDU R Rear Panel Installation of an IDU R unit differs from other IDU models in one respect At the rear of the IDU R see Figure 3 12 there are two jacks labeled Trunks For each IDU R the E1 cable from outside should be plugged into one of the trunks and the E1 cable to the other station should be plugged into the second trunk as in the left hand side of Figure 1 14 Apart from the above difference th
186. iagnostics Clear Counters Log Off Location A B Radio Interface RSS dBm Ethernet Service Ethernet Throughput Mbps TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks E1 Ports Events Log Internal Internal 43 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already 24 06 2009 12 43 07 Connected to A IP Address 19 8 Encrypted Link Figure 9 15 Events Log Display gt To save the Events Log Wireless Link User Manual 1 From the Tools menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog box appears 2 Click the Events Tab 3 Select the file to save 4 Click the check box to open the file for saving Click the button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which folder and under what name the Events Log file is to be saved and click OK To store the Events Log first define the IP address subnet mask default gateway and trap destination address of the managing computer see page 8 7 for details Release 1 9 9 14 Link Manager Traps Link Manager Traps Chapter 9 The Link Manager application issues traps to indicate various events dis played in the Events Log Table 9 5 Link Manager Trap Messages Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in use by Warning Link Manager will not catch any traps from the ProcessName pid ProcessId ODU some other application has grabbe
187. ice was active Under TDM backup link wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalTable N A This table defines keeps the TDM counters of the last day in resolution of 15 min intervals wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalEntry N A This is an entry in the Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalldx RO This table is indexed per interval number Each intervalis of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalActiveSecon RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service ds was active Under TDM backup link wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayTable N A This table defines keeps the TDM counters of the last month in resolution of days wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayEntry N A This is an entry in the Days Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayldx RO This table is indexed per Day number Each intervalis of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayActiveSeconds RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active Under TDM backup link wbbOduPerfMonTxThresh1 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 20 Integer RW When the Transmit power exceeds this threshold wbbOduPerfMonRxThresh1 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 21 Integer RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold wbbOduPerfMonRxThresh2 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 22 Integer RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold wbbOduPerfMonBBERThresh1 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 23 Integer RW When the BBER exceeds this threshold wbbOduPerfMonEthCapacityThreshKbps RW When the current throughput is below this threshold wbbOduPerfM
188. ignals for a period of 60 seconds GE MDS radio products support DFS as well as ACS An immediate consequence of the FCC IC regulation for 5 4 5 3 GHz is that the standard method of link installation using a single default fixed installa tion channel cannot be used Instead of the installation procedure of Chapter 5 a link activation method is used The ODUs are either supplied from the factory ready for use at 5 4 GHz or 5 3 GHz FCC IC or alternatively they can be set up for these bands using the Link Manager The following procedure is generic to all relevant GE MDS radio products 3 What you see on your running Link Manager may differ in some details from ote the screen captures used to illustrate this Appendix FCCIIC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Activation gt To Activate a FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link 1 Install Link Manager software as usual 2 Connect the PC to the IDU ODU pair to be used as the local site Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 J 1 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Activation Appendix J 3 Run the Link Manager and log in as Installer You will see the following window Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help Site Location Get Diagnostics fix 8 Link Link Link ID Services None Frequency GHz 5 580 Channel BW MHz Rate Mbps Status Link Inactive Location Site1 Site2 Radio Interface RSS dBm Rx Tx Rate Units Ethernet Service O Mbps
189. iguration of the system This button is disabled after pink bnstallgton the link is installed Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 6 2 Main Menu Functionality Chapter 6 Table 6 1 Link Manager Toolbar Continued Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site 1 Same as Configuration 1 ME SAL names Configure lt Site 1 name gt Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site 2 Same as Configuration 2 ee name Configure lt Site 2 name gt Get Diagnostics Obtain system information Clear Counters Disabled Log off Closes the current session and logs off Link Manager Exit Exits Link Manager Main Menu Functionality The main menu contains the following items File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help The Link Manager menu functionality is displayed in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Link Manager main menu functionality Return to log on dialog Same as Log Log Off Off button File Exit the Link Manager Same as Exit ext button Run the Configuration Wizard Not available in Configuration Mode Link Configuration available in Installation Mode PARENT Provides limited configuration for site 1 Configure lt Site 1 1 Has a path to return to Installation name gt Mode Configuration Chapter 8 Provides limited configuration for site 2 Configure lt Site 2 2 Has a path to return to Installation name gt Mode Link Installation Runs the Installati
190. igure Operational States C Enabled These settings will apply to both sites Expected Operational States lt Back Next gt Monitor Link i Radio Interface RSS dBm Figure 7 8 HSS Settings The Synchronization Status dialog box displays the current status of each side of the link See Appendix G for instructions about installing and con figuring collocated links If you do not require HSS click Next Step 5 Services Here is the services dialog Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 8 Configuration Chapter 7 Link Configuration Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Services 3xE1 Ethernet Rate Mbps Adaptive v Distance 0 Km 0 Miles IDU A B Product 7 C 04 B000 7 C 04 BO00 HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 7 9 Services and Rates dialog To choose Services see the corresponding Installation procedure in 5 The procedures for setting the Jitter Buffer and Hot Standby parameters are also the same as the corresponding procedures in 5 Click Next to continue Step 6 TDM Clock Configuration The following dialog is displayed Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 9 Configuration Chapter 7 Link Configuration Wizard TDM Parameters Confiqure the TDM Parameters below TX Clock Select M
191. ike 8 5 COMMUTING VIAN SENGS aissis seien a perdit neees peser ten ses ressent 8 5 Lost or forgotten VIAN ID vrsno A 8 7 Displaying the VETO sassssommaagaameknensemevaetkjjeiisddae 8 7 DE GO dannnEnnnnn sente eee dia dat 8 7 Changing the LINK PASSION ersan tarran iadaaa aAA terasse emmen este 8 8 Link Manager Community SINGS vunne 8 8 Editing COMMUNE SINGS cc nsstctserdoiathcuscabcshasamesuntdedovatareeeatateniachiadtasencercinds 8 8 Forgotten COMMURILY STING as cccsteceecsrcorsinecancenssgecbeatisms E AET 8 9 Link Lock Security Featufe rrarvanrnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnennunnnenn 8 10 Setna fhe Date and TIME used innini ansananss 8 12 Enem Prona NE A T 8 14 Connguring the BIdgEr venninna eee 8 14 DIMME nana ee a le a ca 8 15 IDU AGING HME SES Hess eaa ee 8 15 Configuring Ethernet Ports MORE susasmnsnersessnensnnensnnrnnnsnnsnensnenenensneanes 8 15 Setting the Maximum Information Rate is 8 16 TOM MAS RER RE 8 17 FN PAA NS jakke tien 8 18 RESOUN iii tisennsete tenais nine ibe 8 19 IDU DRM es cncemmmmmadinmeunnsmnadansmdliansenmus 8 20 Managing EGG JRR 8 20 Backup CONTIGUTALION to a FIS sasisssnsstnnnrssnsrenitensessesrsre teens Ea 8 20 Restoring Configuration FIC vsistcsissuivossniacidatexsvevannisedenessvevaneuedsencsivacanenness 8 20 Muting the alignment tone DURS crire aa 8 21 te vath TENET isaurene T EEEREN 8 21 Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics Retrieving Link Information Get D gnostites juummasm
192. imated Time Between Errors It is zeroed by the Clear Counters button in the tool bar e For each Trunk the line status and Error block count is dis played It is zeroed by the Clear Counters button in the tool bar The line status is color coded and may be one of e Green Normal e Red Error LOS for loss of signal and AIS for Alarm Indi cation Signal e Yellow loopback e Frequency box It shows the link frequency The color of the box indicates the status po Foner ser e Green is an active link e Red is an inactive link e Magenta shows an authentication or compatibility problem e Brown shows severe compatibility problem Events Log The Events Log stores alarms generated from both sides of the link and is detailed in Chapter 9 Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 26 02 2009 12 16 13 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in Internal 000002 26 02 2009 12 16 14 Connected to Location Internal lt 2 Status Bar S Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 WBB Encrypted Link The Status bar displays the following icons Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 6 7 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 Table 6 3 Status bar indicators Connectivity Shows if Link Manager is communicating with the ODU Connection mode to the ODU Over the Air connection using the IP address of the remote unit Connection availa
193. in the Fresnel zone of the antenna path such as large buildings trees etc e Use a spectrum analyzer with suitable sensitivity to measure the sig nal at the distance between the sites e If nothing improves the receive power level check the overall link e Reduce the distance of the link move the equipment from one site closer to the other site where it is possible to actually see the anten nas with the naked eye e If you now get the expected receive signal level you can assume that the equipment is operational and the problem arises from interference between the sites Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 G 3 Appendix H Hub Site Synchronization What is Hub Site Synchronization When several units are collocated at a common hub site interference may occur from one unit to another ODU units support the collocation of up to 16 units at a central site For Wireless Link HSS support depends on the product model Using a method called Hub Site Synchronization HSS a cable is connected from the master ODU to all collocated ODUs this cable carries pulses sent to each ODU which synchronize their transmission with each other The pulse synchronization ensures that transmission occurs at the same time for all collocated units This also results in all of the hub site units receiving data at the same time eliminating the possibility of interference that could result if some units transmit while other units at the same lo
194. ing from the local user equipment is looped back at the remote side This loopback is initiated from a managing computer connected to the local unit IDU C ODU ODU IDU C Test Equipment ee ee ee Figure 9 8 Remote Internal Loopback Remote External Loopback The remote unit can be set to an external loopback to test the remote E1 T1 port and its connection to the remote side user equipment In this mode data coming from the remote user equipment is looped back to it locally Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 6 Local Internal Loopback Chapter 9 This loopback is initiated by the managing computer connected to the local unit Test IDU C ODU ODU IDU C Equipment Figure 9 9 Remote External Loopback Local Internal Loopback The local unit can be set to close an internal loopback to test connection between the local and remote units and between the remote E1 T1 port and its connection to the remote user equipment In this mode data com ing from the remote user equipment is looped back to it locally This loop back is initiated by the managing computer connected to the local unit Test IDU C ODU ODU IDU C Equipment Figure 9 10 Local Internal Loopback Reinstalling and Realigning a Link It may be necessary to reinstall the link if the ODUs need to be realigned E Activating Install Mode causes both sites to go into install mode causing disruption in service for approximately fifteen seconds ote
195. ink Pass word button The following window is displayed Alternative Link Password Alternative Link Password The Alternative Link Password is supplied with the product Tt may also be obtained via Customer Support Please have the unit s Serial Number and or MAC Address ready when requesting an Alternative Link Password Enter the Alternative Link Password Figure 5 4 Lost or forgotten Link Password recovery Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 5 Installation S Note Chapter 5 Follow the instructions to use the Alternative Link Password and click OK to finish You are returned to the window in Figure 5 3 above Continue with the next step Enter a new password Retype the new password in the Confirm field Click OK Click Yes when asked if you want to change the link password Click OK at the Password changed success message N MN UT A WU e Restoring Factory Defaults returns the Link Password to wireless bridge e Ifthe link is inactive then the link password may also be changed from the Site Configuration dialogs See page 8 12 Step 3 Channel Settings Wireless Link systems have a feature called Automatic Channel Selection ACS In the event of sync loss ACS chooses the first available channel in a list of monitored channels nominated in the Channel settings window of Figure 5 5 below A channel switch takes place sufficiently fast as to ensure no loss of se
196. ink User Manual Release 1 9 K 6 Installing an MHS Appendix K Link Manager 10 105 1 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help ej x FY amp 2 Link Configuration Link Installation Site 1 2 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters gt Link Link Location 1 2 1 4 Link ID Setup 1 Radio Interface Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive rnet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Status Link Active IP Address 10 105 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 vice Primary Link Active Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current die ie mat Time Between Errors GE ee SNS Error Blocks IP Address 10 105 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 11 Events Log Number Date amp Time Trap Source 000002 3 30 2009 10 27 34 AM Compatible IDUs detected 000003 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened 000004 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm 000005 3 30 2009 10 31 37 AM Compatible IDUs detected lt SS Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 1 2 DFS Encrypted Link Figure K 6 The primary link under normal operation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 7 Installing an MHS Appendix K Link Manager 10 105 2 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help ay x Fo 4 2 Link Configuration
197. installFreq RO Represents the Multi band sub band installation frequency in KHz wbbOduAirComboSubBandAdminState RO Represents the Multi band sub band administrative state wbbOduAirComboSubBandinstallationAll RO Reflects if the Multi band sub band allowes owed installtion wbbOduAirComboNumberOfSubBands 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 2 Integer RO Represents the number of Multi band sub bands wbbOduAirComboSwitchSubBand 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 3 DisplayString RW Switch sub band operation with a given sub band ID The get operation retrieves the current sub band ID wbbOduAirinternalMaxRate RO Max Ethernet throughput of the site in Kpbs wbbOduAirCapacityDirection RW Capacity direction of the site wbbOduPerfMonCurrTable N A This table defines keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonCurrEntry N A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonCurrUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 1 Gauge RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonCurrES 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 2 Gauge RO Current number of Errored Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonCurrSES 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 3 Gauge RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonCurrBBE 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 4 Gauge RO Current number of Background Block Er
198. interference condition E During the installation procedure the definition of all parameters is Note automatically applied to both sides of the link e The ODUs as supplied are set up with a factory default band If for some reason the default band needs to be changed it should A be done before link Installation The procedure is set out in Appen Caution dix E e Use of an incorrect band may be in violation of local regulations 2 Link Configuration described in 7 Configuration provides much the same functionality as Installation but for a running link A fallback to Installation mode is provided for situa tions which cannot be handled without resetting the link such as antenna realignment and IDU or ODU replacement Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 9 Default Settings Chapter 4 The Link Installation and Configuration phases are both carried out with Wizards which walk you through the processes The Wizards are visu ally quite similar and will be described in detail below 3 Site Configuration described in 8 Site specific configuration for each side of the link is available at any time under a running link or under the restricted Installation mode Site Configuration consists of a set of panels which may be invoked indi vidually in any order as needed An installed and configured link can be returned to installation mode for re installation and configuration from last setting
199. ion with loaded trunks gt To verify the installation Caution Wireless Link User Manual Verify that the Radio Signal Strength RSS is according to expected results as determined by the Link Budget Calculator Installation mode as described above may be re entered using Site A or Site B and Installation Mode in the Site Configuration dialog Some Installation mode functionality may cause a break in or degrade link service If you can accomplish link changes without affecting the service always prefer to use Configuration mode described in 7 Release 1 9 5 18 Chapter 6 The Link Manager Main Window One Manager for all Intrepid Radio Products The Link Manager application is largely generic to all Intrepid Radio Products Functionality differences are minimal according to radio series Wireless Link and Wireless Mux capabilities The Main Window of the Link Manager Ensure that the Link Manager is running The main window should look similar to that in Figure 6 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 6 1 The Link Manager Toolbar Chapter 6 Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help ay x Link Configuration ik Installation JY Link TPSF_8TT Link ID EBG 29561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destina
200. is its description 1 Description Unauthorized remote ODU connection rejected linkLockUnauthorizedODU 123 major Indicates that the ODU is unauthorized Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Unauthorized ODU connection rejected hotStandbyAlarm 124 major Indicates that the hot standby secondary link was activated Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Secondary Link Is Active sfpinsertion 126 normal Indicates that a device was inserted to SFP Port sfpPort1DisconnectedAlarm 127 major Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to disconnected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description SFP port 1 status changed to disconnected tdmServiceClear 200 normal Indicates that TDM Service fault is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM Service Normal ethServiceOpened 201 normal Indicates that Ethernet Service has been opened Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Ethernet Service has been opened encryptionClear 203 normal Indicates that encryption is OK Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Encryption Status Normal changeLinkPasswordClear 204 normal Indicates that the Link Password was changed successfully Contains a single parameter which is its desc
201. ished OK Figure 8 21 Telnet Management window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 24 Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics The Link Manager application enables you to monitor the link as well as perform diagnostic operations such as loopback tests This chapter covers e Retrieving link information e Link compatibility issues e TDM port loopbacks e Reinstalling and realigning a link e Link Budget Calculator e Performance monitoring e Throughput checking e Events alarms and Traps e Reverting alert messages e Remote power fail indication e Troubleshooting e Replacing an ODU e Restoring to factory setup e Online help e Obtaining support Retrieving Link Information Get Diagnostics The Get Diagnostics feature collects and writes all link and Manager infor mation from both sites into a text file The file information can be used for diagnostics and should be sent to GE MDS Customer Support to expedite assis tance Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 1 Link Compatibility Chapter 9 The following table lists link and system information that can be monitored Table 9 1 Get Diagnostics Data and Description System Data General information about the system Link Information Information about the link properties e List of system events including those from other sites if this Events Log site is defined as the trap destination Last 256 events from both sites
202. ith polarities left to right minus ground plus To avoid damage to the IDU always use an AC DC adapter supplied by the manufacturer Ensure that the IDUs at both sites are powered up The IDU E R models have a two pin power connector and an AC DC adapter supplied by GE MDS Connecting the ODU to the IDU The ODU IDU cable conducts all the user traffic between the IDU and the ODU and also provides power to the ODU The maximum length of the ODU IDU cable is 100m 328ft in accordance with 10 100BaseT standards The ODU IDU cable is supplied pre assembled with RJ 45 connectors at the length specified when ordering or as a cable drum with spare connectors If the ODU IDU cable was not ordered use an outdoor class CAT 5e 24AWG shielded cable See Appendix K for Wiring Specifications To connect the ODU to the IDU route the cable from the ODU to the IDU secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the ODU RJ 45 connector on the IDU see item B in Figure 3 13 above Installing a Link using PoE Devices The PoE device is a very simple unit having a power input connector and two Ethernet ports It is AC powered and has a power LED gt To prepare a link using PoE devices 1 To connect the ODU to the PoE device route the cable from the ODU to the PoE device secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the LAN OUT RJ 45 connector on the PoE device 2 Connect it to AC power 3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 fo
203. ive Distance oKm i 0 Miles IDU 1 2 1 4 Product 7 C 04 B000 7 C 04 B000 HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure K 4 Services Configuration Panel showing Hot Standby tab After you have configured TDM services click the new Hot Standby tab Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 5 Installing an MHS Appendix K Link Configuration Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate pa Service Configuration TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Mode 9 Primary O Secondary Disabled A Verny fhe second ink is configured as Secondary IDU 152 1 4 Product 7 C 04 B000 7 C 04 B000 HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure K 5 Services Configuration Panel Hot Standby mode selection Check the Primary button to configure Primary Link as the primary link 8 Complete the Wizard and then move to Secondary Link 9 Repeat step 8 for Secondary Link For the Services Hot Standby tab this time check the Secondary button 10 Complete the Wizard 11 At Site 1 2 reconnect the Hot Standby Patch panel to the external equipment From this point on we will simply refer to primary and secondary link no capitalized names At the end of the process the Link Manager main windows should look like this Wireless L
204. k Radio Interface RSS dBm Figure 5 17 Services and TDM delay set link ready for evaluation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 14 Installation Chapter 5 3 You may make any further changes to the Service Configuration or the Jitter buffer When you are satisfied click the Evaluate The optimum transmission rate for the selected services is evaluated Following a short delay for processing Back and Next are enabled 4 Click Next to continue BS The transmission rates used by Wireless Link are shown in Table 5 4 above ote Step 6 TDM Clock Configuration The following dialog is displayed Link Installation Wizard TDM Parameters Configure the TDM Parameters below TX Clock Select Maximum Deselect All Master Clock Independent Clock Per Port Supported Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dBm sec min hour day monthyear sec min hour day monthyear Figure 5 18 TDM Parameters Configuration 1 gt To configure TDM clock parameters 1 For any individual port click it For the same parameters for all ports click the Select All tag e Select Maximum will select the maximum number of services that S amp S can be carried by the air interface ote e Select All unconditionally selects all of the services 2 Click Configure The following drop down list is displayed Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 15 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard
205. kup of leased lines The IDU R monitors the status of leased lines and in the event of a connection fail ure automatically switches to the radio link You may choose which of the two links is the main link and which is the backup link The IDU R may be configured for multi hop see Appendix L 1 2 1 LAN TRUNKS ne Figure 1 13 IDU R Rear Panel am nd ETI Em 2 m Em I IDU R IDU A IDU R IDU R EEE Leased Line Leased Line Leased Line Figure 1 14 Backup link for E1 T1 connections IDU C The IDU C is a carrier class 19 inch 1U unit providing E1 T1 ports Ethernet ports dry contact alarms and indication LEDs It has two DC power feed connectors An AC to DC converter is available for powering the IDU C from an AC source The IDU C is designed to be rack mounted Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 10 Power Over Ethernet PoE Devices Chapter 1 Four IDU C products are supported by Wireless Link with 16 8 4 or no TDM ports Wireless Link uses the first four TDM ports only DUC r Figure 1 15 IDU C Ethernet only front panel TAT x IDU C 4 ER ax ed H 1 TT E E mas Figure 1 16 IDU C 4 E1 T1 ports front panel You can use an IDU C with 4 8 or 16 ports Wireless Link will recognize ports 1 4 only Power Over Ethernet PoE Devices Basic PoE Device The basic PoE device provides Ethernet ser vice only with power for the ODU The PoE device is extremely compact having on
206. l Alarms IP Address 192 168 2 10 255 255 255 128 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Trap Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I Operations OK Cancel Figure D 5 ODU with IP Addressing configured 11 Click OK You are asked to confirm the change Site Configuration Location fou are about to change ODU parameters This process will last several seconds The IP parameters will be changed and will produce a disconnection from the local unit Do you wish to continue Figure D 6 Confirmation of IP Address change Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 The procedure Appendix D 12 Click Yes to accept the change After about half a minute the changes will be registered in the ODU On the left hand panel of the main win dow you will see the new IP configuration for the ODU Link Manager 255 255 255 255 Operator DER File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x figuration istallat Site Location 51122 Configurat Get Diagnostics S Link Link Link ID Services None Frequency GHz 5 820 RSS dBm Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Location Radio Interface Status Transmitting Ethernet Throughput Mbps Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Addre
207. lable as is the Climate factor list Both of these quantities are calculated The Rate shown defines the air interface rate in Mbps The system operates in TDD mode and has the overhead of the air interface pro toco Thus the Ethernet actual throughput is provided by the Ethernet Rate S ote For a given air rate Ethernet throughput will decrease with increasing range due to propagation delay The Fade margin is the minimum required for LOS conditions For degraded link conditions a larger Fade margin should be used The EIRP is given in dBm and Watts Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 9 WBB B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Marain Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Recommended antenna height Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix B WBB Link Budget R G58 FCC INT v 20 MHz Wi Auto M 9 Mb s BPSK 0 75 v 16 dBm 4 16 dB dB dB 6 dB 38 dBm 6 3 Watt 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles 46 Km 28 6 Miles Expected Performance El 5 8 GHz 48 Km Al Good C 0 25 v Km Mile 81 dBm Ethernet Only w 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only 15 Meter 49 Feet Calculate 98 666 availability downtime 7
208. lection process will result in a service interruption Le J Do you wish to continue If you accept then the system will search for the best operating channel Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 5 Configuration Chapter 7 Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization Automatic Channel Selectior Available Channels List GHz 5 740 5255 5 770 5 785 5 800 5 815 5 745 5 760 5 775 5 790 5 805 5 820 5 750 5 765 5 780 5795 5 810 5 825 gt ss Scanning Channels Cancel Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Evaluation Figure 7 4 Searching for the best operating channel The link will return to the status of Figure 7 3 above with a possible change to the operating channel If you work without automatic channel selection the Channel Settings win dow looks like this Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in a Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz 5 780 be Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 v C Automatic Channel Selection Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 7 5 Channel Settings without automatic channel selection Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 7 6 Configuration Chapter 7 If you click the Operating Channel drop down list the following window appears Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any chan
209. local and remote sites are some times referred to as near and far HQ and remote and so on The site which is closer to the network core often the local site will be referred to as s te and the opposite side of the link usually closer to the end user as s te B This choice is application neutral and will be used throughout the manual both to describe the sites and their names as in the examples The link is configured and managed using a PC the managing computer connected to site A The precise requirements for the managing computer are set out on page 4 1 We will occasionally need to distinguish between the site to which the man aging computer is connected and the second site when they are not nec essarily A or B The former will be called the managing site and the latter the over the air site Which is which is always determined by the loca tion of the managing computer Wireless Link supports three connection methods for the managing com puter e Local a direct peer to peer connection between the Ethernet ports on the managing computer and the IDU or PoE device Local con nection is always read write e Network the managing computer and the site A IDU or PoE device belong to a LAN and communicate through a router or hub e Over the air the managing computer connects to site B via the air interface e The managing computer may be connected to the link through an IDU or a PoE device I
210. made to the Link should be reflected in Link Quality monitor All the fields are mandatory Monitor Link Radio Interface Location Location RSS dem 46 A7 Quality No Sery Ethemet Ethemet TOM No Sery Ethernet Ethemet TDM Figure 5 1 Link Installation Wizard The bottom data area reproduces the corresponding data from the main window which the above panel obscures See 6 for a field by field descrip tion of this data area Click Next to proceed with the installation procedure Step 2 System Parameters The system dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 3 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard System Fill in the attribute Fields below Link ID Link Name Site 1 Location Site 2 Location Link Password Monitor Link Radio Interface Location Location RSS dem 46 ki No Serv Ethernet Ethemet TDM No Serv Ethernet Ethemet TDM Quality mm Figure 5 2 Installation Wizard System dialog box gt To complete Installation Step 2 Note Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 Enter a Link ID The Link ID must be identical for both ODUs in the link otherwise they will not communicate The Link ID must include at least eight alphanumeric characters Up to 24 characters are allowed You should use a Link ID composed of both alphabetic and numeric characters 2 Enter a Link Name for the link identification The default name is
211. may be located anywhere accessible by the operator The SWU provides for prior backup of the current files prior to upgrade The default location of the software files is in the installation area and can be used to restore factory defaults m The following procedure is generic to all GE MDS radio products What you see 5 on your running Link Manager may differ in some details from the screen ote captures used to illustrate this Appendix Upgrading an Installed Link gt To upgrade software for a link 1 In the Link Manager main menu click Tools Software Upgrade The following detached window appears Software Upgrade Tool File Actions Help gt Poles al Ds Start Upgrade Stop Upgrade AddSite Clear all Upgrade Package Save Configuration Close Software Upgrade details Available Release Description Backup device software 1 Perform Reset to each device after successful upgrade IP Address Site Name amp Direct connection 192 168 2 101 A 1 9 00 b1715 Jun 7 2009 D Air connection 192 168 2 102 B 1 9 00 b1715 Jun 7 2009 Figure F 1 Software Upgrade Utility Main window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 F 1 Upgrading an Installed Link Appendix F The default sites shown in the Software Upgrade list panel belong to the currently link The list may be empty if you are running the Link Manager offline 2
212. n e CN China MII radio regulation e UK Office of Communications Radio Interface Requirement e HP Universal Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 8 AIND All Indoor Unit Chapter 1 AIND All Indoor Unit The AIND All Indoor unit offers a single enclosure for Radio and Multiplexer modules It enables outdoor placement of only a pas sive element fl M ss Figure 1 9 AIND All Indoor unit connected to antenna The Indoor Unit IDU The IDU has the service ports and provides aggregation of these services towards the ODU that transports them over the air The IDU also provides power to the ODU The following models are available for Wireless Link IDU E The IDU E is a compact half 19 inch wide 1U plastic unit providing up to two Ethernet ports and up to two E1 T1 interfaces It is a low cost unit intended for Access applications and Enterprise use Figure 1 10 IDU E and IDU R front view pu S N Figure 1 11 Typical IDU E Rear Panel The IDU E is also available with a 25 pin Dry Contact Alarms port on the rear panel Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 9 The Indoor Unit IDU Chapter 1 Figure 1 12 IDU E AL with Alarms port IDU R The IDU R is a compact half 19 inch 1U plastic unit for 1 x T1 E1 backup providing in addition 2 Ethernet ports and an external alarms interface The IDU R is an indoor unit used for automatic bac
213. n Tools Maintenance Help s x 2 amp Ca Link Configuration Link Installation Site 1 2 Site 1 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Link Link Link ID Setup 1 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dBm Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service OMbps Fps Status CLOR Acties Ethernet Throughput Mbps Location Site 1 2 IP Address 10 105 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 TOM Semice Primary Link Active Tr Dona 10 108 12 Estimated Time Between Errors se nin OS lt lt ce ONE Error Blocks IP Address 10 105 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 11 Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000002 3 30 2009 10 27 34 AM Compatible IDUs detected iz 000003 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened 12 000004 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm 12 000005 3 30 2009 10 31 37 AM Compatible IDUs detected 12 lt M 7 Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 1 2 Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure K 12 Primary link operating after the switch back from secondary Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 15 System Operation description Appendix K Link Manager 10 105 2 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x 4 e g ia Link Configuration Link Installation Site 2 2 Site 2 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log Off f
214. n tool bar 2 Choose the Security tab The following window is displayed Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 10 Link Lock Security Feature Chapter 8 i Site Configuration File Actions Help ki P 6 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off i Installation Mode Q Air Interface Community 22 Hub Site Sync SNMP Communities D Management Inventory Link Password Value Link Password Date amp Time Link Lock Advanced s Ethernet B TDM Services XX External Alarms Sy O Lock the Link I Operations 3 Click the Link Lock check box and then OK You are asked to confirm the lock Site Configuration fou are about to change ODU parameters 2 The local ODU can be synchronized exclusively to the current remote ODU Do you wish to continue 4 Click the Yes button and you are returned to the main window of the Link Manager Observe that a link icon is now displayed in the status bar on the bottom right of the Link Manager window RIO Encrypted Link The link to the remote unit is now locked If you repeat steps 1 and 2 above the Security screen will look like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 11 Setting the Date and Time Chapter 8 S o Site Configuration A File Actions Help i Pe 2 5 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Security C it Air Interface rua ora 22 Hub Site Sync leste Change B Manageme
215. n what follows where ever we refer to an IDU it includes PoE devices unless stated otherwise Typically if we need to refer to an IDU as such we will use a model name such as IDU C Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 16 Conventions Used in this Manual Chapter 1 Conventions Used in this Manual HD 8 Caution Warning Notifications Notifications consist of Notes Cautions and Warnings The purpose of a Note is to e Draw your attention to something that may not be obvious or coun ter intuitive e Emphasize a special feature or peculiarity of the Wireless Link e Offer an external reference for additional information e Add a caveat that would not qualify as a full Caution or Warning see below e Provide additional background to what follows e Offer a recommendation e Highlight an indication of something to watch out for e Advise you if an action has side effects i e it may disturb something else that would be best left undisturbed e Remind you of something that should be kept in mind A Caution is a notification of risk of damage to equipment or of service degradation A Warning is a notification of risk of danger to persons operating near the equipment Typographical conventions General Where a term is defined or introduced for the first time it is shown in Bold face You will have noticed this usage in the Terminology section above Software The Link Manager is a Microso
216. nal Level per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirIntervalTSLThresh1E RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level xceed exceeded the TSL1 threshold per interval Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 11 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 8 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbbOduPerfMonAirlntervalBBERThresh1 RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio Exceed exceeded the BBER1 threshold per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirDay Table N A This table defines keeps the air counters of the last month in resolution of days wbbOduPerfMonAirDayEntry N A This is an entry in the Days Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonAirDayldx RO This table is indexed per Day number Each Dayis of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonAirDayMinRSL RO Current Min Received Level Reference per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayMaxRSL RO Current Max Received Level Reference per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayRSLThresh1Exce RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level ed exceeded the RSL1 threshold per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayRSLThresh2Exce RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level ed exceeded the RSL2 threshold per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayMinTSL RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayMaxTSL RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayTSLThresh1Exce RO Number of s
217. nd pack aging materials should be used whenever possible All factory returns should be addressed to GE MDS LLC Product Services Department SRO No XXXX 175 Science Parkway Rochester NY 14620 USA When repairs have been completed the equipment will be returned to you by the same shipping method used to send it to the factory Please specify if you wish to make different shipping arrangements To inquire about an in process repair you may contact our Product Services Group using the telephone Fax or e mail information given above GE MDS LLC 175 Science Parkway Rochester NY 14620 General Business 1 585 242 9600 FAX 1 585 242 9620 Web www gemds com
218. nd priority Displaying the Inventory gt To view the inventory data 1 Choose a site from the main menu The Configuration dialog box opens 2 Choose Inventory i Site Configuration A File Actions Help ri 5 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Inventory Air Interface Property Value 22 Hub Site Sync ODU Product R H G58 FCC CO EXT 8 B Management HW Version SW Version 1 9 00 b1720 Jun 23 2009 Inventory MAC Address 00 15 67 12 2c 3e Securi IDU R Y Product 7 C 04 8000 3 Date amp Time HW Version Advanced SW Version 1 9 00 b3070 Jun 21 2009 ak Ethernet Vendor Name Device is not detected vendor Pn e TDM Services Version XT External Alarms I Operations OK Cancel Figure 8 6 Inventory window Security Features The Security dialog enables you to change the Link Password and the SNMP Community strings and use the Link Lock feature Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 7 Changing the Link Password Chapter 8 i Site Configuration A File Actions Help m B Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off 7 Installation Mode System Community lg Air Interface 5 22 Hub Site Sync SNMP Communities B Management Inventory Link Password Value Link Password Date amp Time lek Lock G Advanced a Ethernet amp TDM Services 2X External Alarms S O Lock the Link I Operations Figure 8 7 Available
219. ne at a time you can add sites from a prepared list using the Add from File option in Figure F 2 The list has the following format lt IP address gt lt Read Only community gt lt Read Write community gt Here is an example 192 168 1 101 public netman 192 168 1 102 public netman 192 168 2 101 public netman 192 168 2 102 public netman 3 Having created an update list click Upgrade Package to chose the rel evant files The default files are located in the SWU subdirectory in the Link Manager installation area They are currently named SWU_1k swu and SWU 2k swu You may have to find them elsewhere depending on your system 4 To back up your existing system check Backup device software Then click the LJ button for a standard file dialog The default location is the My Documents directory on the managing computer The backup here is the same as that in page 8 28 and serves the same purpose It provides a fallback if the upgrade proves problematic HID o 5 The next check box determines whether or not the sites should be reset immediately after the upgrade Bear in mind that on the one hand a reset involves a service interruption but on the other hand the software upgrade will not become effective until after the reset is carried out 6 Click Start Upgrade to commence the process Software Upgrade Tool File Actions Help gt 2 gt Start Upgrade Stop Upgrade Add Site Clear all Upgrade Package Save
220. ne logged into the secondary link To see how to run two copies of the Link Manager see Monitoring the Links below Here then is the situation after a cut over to the secondary link For the primary link the following window will appear for a few seconds Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 8 Installing an MHS Appendix K Link Manager 10 105 1 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help 3 x v amp amp 2 Link Configuration Link Installation Site 1 2 Site 1 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters gt Link Link Location 1 2 1 4 Link ID Setup 1 Radio Interface Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service x Tx Rate Units Mbps Sn Eee Ethernet Throughput Mbps IP Address 10 105 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 TDM Service Primary Link Not Active Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current aed Estimated Tine Between Errors EE IP Address 10 105 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 11 Frequency Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000028 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM Compatible IDUs detected 42 000029 3 30 2009 10 37 39 4M Ethernet Service has been opened ta 000030 3 30 2009 10 37 39 4M 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened 000031 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm i S Connection Available Connection Mo
221. ng an ODU 9 20 restore configuration file 8 2 S Safety Practices iii iv 3 1 Grounding 3 1 Preventing overexposure to RF energy 3 1 Security Link Lock 8 10 Selecting channel 5 6 SFP device P 1 support described P 1 Technical N 3 Site Configuration Configuration Files 8 20 backup to 8 20 Configuration files restore from 8 20 Configuration with Telnet 8 21 Dialog Ethernet Properties 8 14 Configuring Index 4 Bridge 8 14 Radio Maximum information rate 8 16 Safety Ports Mode 8 15 TDM Interface Ethernet PropertiesIDU Aging time 8 Telnet configuration 15 TDM Functions 8 2 Trap messages Inventory 8 7 Trunk Ports Menu bar 8 2 pinout Setting the date and time View Air Iinterface details VLAN Settings Lost or forgotten VLAN ID Priority number 8 6 VLAN ID 8 6 W External Alarm Inputs 8 18 et Reset site 8 19 rede Reset site to factory defaults 8 19 C onnector Reset site preserve current configuration IDU C 8 19 Security Features 8 7 S Community Strings 8 8 Jaer Por Editing 8 8 EAN Forgotten paswwords 8 9 Poris ODU IDU Cable Initial log on defaults 8 9 Ports Default Gateway 8 5 IP address 8 5 8 5 U aa Connector Trap Destination 8 5 ES Software Upgarde Multiple sites F 3 Single Site F 2 Software Upgrade F 1 SSID G 3 T TDM Services Clock configuration 5 15 Evaluation 5 14 in Link Budget calculation B 1 Jitter Buffer 5 12 Loopbacks 9 3 modulation rate 5 12 over internet with SFP P 1 selection 5 9 TDD in
222. nitialization of the entity s network management system to the next re initialization ifDescr 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 DisplayString RO A textual string containing information about the interface This string should include the name of the manufacturer the product name and the version of the hardware interface ifType 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 Integer RO The type of interface distinguished according to the physical link protocol s immediately below the network layer in the protocol stack ifSpeed 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 Gauge RO An estimate of the interface s current bandwidth in bits per second For interfaces which do not vary in bandwidth or for those where no accurate estimation can be made this object should ontain the nominal bandwidth ifPhysAddress 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 6 Phys Address RO The interface s address at the protocol layer immediately below the network layer in the protocol stack For interfaces which do not have such an address e g a serial line this object should contain an octet string of zero length ifAdminStatus 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 7 Integer RW The desired state of the interface The testing 3 state indicates that no operational packets can be passed ifOperStatus 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 8 Integer RO The current operational state of the interface The testing 3 state indicates that no operational packets can be passed i
223. nk is up Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Radio Link Sync on channel n GHz n Is the channel frequency in GHz linkDown 3 critical Indicates that the radio link is down Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Radio Link Out of Sync The reason is S s Is the reason detectIDU 4 normal Indicates that the IDU was detected Raised by both sides of the link Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description IDU of Type s was Detected s Is the type of the IDU disconnectIDU 5 major Indicates that the IDU was disconnected Raised by both sides of the link Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description IDU Disconnected mismatchIDU 6 major Indicates a mismatch between the IDUs Raised by the master only Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description IDUs Mismatch One Side is s and the Other is s s Is the type of the IDU openedServices 7 normal Indicates that services were opened Raised by the master only Contains 3 parameters 1 Description n2 out of n1 Requested TDM Trunks have been Opened2 n1 Is the requested number of TDM truncks3 n2 Is the actual number of TDM trunks that were opened closedServices 8 normal Indicates that services were closed Raised by the master only Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM Service h
224. nnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 6 2 TABLE 6 2 LINK MANAGER MAIN MENU FUNCTIONALITY anuvnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 6 3 TABLE 6 3 STATUS BAR INDICATORS avannnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnne 6 8 TABLE 7 1 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD uavnannnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 7 2 TABLE 8 1 ODU MODE CONFIGURATION FOR COMMON SCENARIOS cesesseseesesaveuveusuenes 8 15 TABLE 8 2 TELNET COMMANDS i annannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnenennen 8 22 TABLE 9 1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DATA AND DESCRIPTION cseececceceveueaueuseueuvaveuseusevaveavans 9 2 TABLE 9 2 LINK COMPATIBILITY TRAP MESSAGES ccecesecseeseueuceveusaueuseueevaveuseuseeaueauens 9 3 TABLE 9 3 EXPLANATION OF PERFORMANCE DATA anunavnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 9 11 TABLE 9 4 ACTION OF THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS cccsceseceuseusueaueaueuseueeeauausaususavaueaueess 9 12 TABLE 9 5 LINK MANAGER TRAP MESSAGES uvnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 9 15 TABLE 9 6 ACTIVE ALARMS COMMAND BUTTONS sscccececseceueuseususaueuvaueuseusevaueuvauseeness 9 17 TABLE 9 7 LED FAULT INDICATORS cceccececcucuseusaueusueeusauausaususaueueaueuseusevausuvauseenes 9 19 TABLE 9 8 SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING cceccescceuccseueaususeusueaueaueusuueueauausuusesaveusaueess 9 19 TABLE A 1 BILL OF MATERIALS ODU MOUNTING KIT aunnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne A 1 T
225. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 7 10 FIGURE 7 11 CONFIGURATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY iavannnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnne 7 10 FIGURE 7 12 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER CONFIGURATION sesseseusesseeevaueas 7 11 FIGURE 8 1 CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX arsrvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn 8 2 FIGURE 8 2 AIR INTERFACE DETAILS uanvannnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen 8 3 FIGURE 8 3 HSS STATUS ard adr Er Re rn dot s anne bre d duire 8 4 FIGURE 8 4 MANAGEMENT ADDRESSES SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ssseseeseueeenens 8 5 FIGURE 8 5 CONFIGURING MANAGEMENT TRAFFIC VLAN SETTINGS ceceseeseesesaveusauseenes 8 6 FIGURE 8 6 INVENTORY WINDOW aunavannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennen 8 7 FIGURE 8 7 AVAILABLE SECURITY FEATURES avnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn 8 8 FIGURE 8 8 CHANGING THE COMMUNITY STRING cceseecceseccueusaueueeueeeaueuseusueaueavausauenss 8 9 FIGURE 8 9 ALTERNATIVE COMMUNITY DIALOG BOX uannnvnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 8 10 FIGURE 8 10 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURATION avarnunnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 8 13 FIGURE 8 11 CHANGE DATE AND TIME uaununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnne 8 13 FIGURE 8 12 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURED FROM AN NTP SERVER seeseceseeveuseueusevaueas 8 14 FIGURE 8 13 BRIDGE CONFIGURATION SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX esseceseevaveas 8 14 FIGUR
226. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn E 4 FIGURE E 6 MAIN WINDOW AFTER BAND CHANGE NEW BAND CIRCLED cseeceseveeveueeenes E 5 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 XV FIGURE F 1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE UTILITY MAIN WINDOW anvrvvnvevnvnrnnnrnnvnnennnrrernrennnner F 1 FIGURE F 2 ADD SITE OPTIONS uunannnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenen F 2 FIGURE F 3 ADDING A SINGLE SITE FOR UPGRADE anunnavnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn F 2 FIGURE F 4 SINGLE SITE ADDED FOR UPGRADE i arannnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennen F 2 FIGURE F 5 SOFTWARE UPGRADE IN PROGRESS NOTE THE STOP BUTTON ssseseseeseueeeness F 3 FIGURE G 1 WIRELESS LINK LINK SETUP unannannnnnnnnnnnnennvnnnannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne G 1 FIGURE H 1 INTERFERENCE CAUSED BY COLLOCATED UNITS anannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennr H 2 FIGURE H 2 COLLOCATED UNITS USING HUB SITE SYNCHRONIZATION 1 H 2 FIGURE H 3 COLLOCATED UNITS USING HUB SITE SYNCHRONIZATION 2 H 2 FIGURE H 4 HSS INTERCONNECTION UNIT cccccecssccveuseeeuseeeusueuseusueaveusaueusavaueaveusens H 3 FIGURE H 5 RADIO FRAME PATTERN iaanvnnnnnannannnnnvnnnnnnennvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnenne H 5 FIGURE H 6 HUB SITE SYNCHRONIZATION SETTINGS DIALOG BOX avurnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr H 6 FIGURE H 7 HUB SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX aunnennvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennr H 7 FIGURE H 8 SITE CONFIGURATION HUB SITE SYNC DIALOG BOX auvurnn
227. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne H 8 FIGURE H 9 HSS NOT SUPPORTED cccececevecseuseesuccuauseueusuesueaueuseeeusauausueusavausaveusens H 9 FIGURE I 1 INACTIVE LINK STATE aunnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnennn I 1 FIGURE I 2 BRS AIR INTERFACE DIALOG BOX ccccesccueueeeeecaueusaueusuueusaueuseusueaueuvauseenass I 2 FIGURE I 3 BRS CHANNEL SETTINGS PRE TRANSITION ccecesceccceuceeeesaueuseuseeaueuvauseeses I 2 FIGURE I 4 BRS CHANNEL SETTINGS POST TRANSITION cceseeeeceuceseeeaueuseuseeaveuvauseesess I 3 FIGURE J 1 ACTIVATING AN ODU INACTIVE LINK uannavnvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn J 2 FIGURE J 2 AIR INTERFACE DIALOG BOX usannvnnvnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn J 2 FIGURE J 3 THE LOCAL ODU AFTER ACTIVATION PROBING iaaunnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenen J 3 FIGURE J 4 BOTH SITES ACTIVATED AND AWAITING CONFIGURATION aunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn J 4 FIGURE J 5 CHANNEL SELECT DIALOG BOX ACS PERMANENTLY ENABLED sseceseeveuseveuss J 5 FIGURE J 6 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHZ OPERATIONAL iuvnarnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn J 6 FIGURE K 1 MONITORED HOT STANDBY is uannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn K 1 FIGURE K 2 Y CONNECTION PATCH PANEL aunannnnnvnnnannnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnenn K 3 FIGURE K 3 HOW TO CONNECT THE IDUS TO THE PATCH PANEL vuvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn K 4 FIGURE K 4 SERVICES CONFIGURATION PANEL SHOWING HOT S
228. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 10 FIGURE 3 14 IDU C A PERSPECTIVE VIEW uaunnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 11 FIGURE 3 15 IDU C FRONT PANEL LEDS iuvuvanvnnnnnnnnnvnnnavnnnavnnnnnnnnannannnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 12 FIGURE 3 16 IDU E R FRONT PANEL LEDS cceccssecseeeueeeeeseuseeeeeuesauseeeeeueesausauens 3 12 FIGURE 3 17 IDU C POWER CONNECTORS i aunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 13 FIGURE 3 18 BEEP SEQUENCE FOR ANTENNA ALIGNMENT cceccseceeceeececeeeeseeesauenseeesans 3 16 FIGURE 4 1 LAN PORTS ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE IDU C cccceceseeseseseveesauseeeess 4 2 FIGURE 4 2 PINGING AN UNINSTALLED AND UNCONFIGURED LINK v eceseesaveeseeeeavenvauseenes 4 3 FIGURE 4 3 FIRST TIME LOG ON WINDOW vavnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennen 4 3 FIGURE 4 4 EXTENDED LOG ON WINDOW uvnrnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnansnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannennnnen 4 4 FIGURE 4 5 LOG ON WINDOW EXPOSING THE USER TYPES varnunnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannennnnnn 4 4 FIGURE 4 6 UNSUPPORTED DEVICE MESSAGE unanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnen 4 6 FIGURE 4 7 UNREACHABLE DEVICE MESSAGE uaannrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn 4 6 FIGURE 4 8 OPENING LINK MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION IDU C 4 8 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 xiii FIGURE 4 9 OPENING LINK MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION IDU E
229. nnnvnnnnnnrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnvnnnnner 0 3 DL Power DEP MINA Rss daas di nement ana ai inusten ds 0 4 IDU G nd BDU savekasvarsrdissekdne v rdag 0 4 DORE EEE EE EE OA EE OAA O 4 Appendix P Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver IDC SFP DE cran eaea P 1 Appendix Q MIB Reference PE nuance Q 1 About the MIB sssr aina ee EEEO KR DEE E Q 1 IKEA 1740 00 viiscswnssvnecevederanesvvdivesadesavsdesessenetessvevanessetvessveuaveseteceseuesinnesses Q 1 a ER no Q 1 CONGO Met d wss minime etat us Ge mot en aa sveWadeksenasesedatanedves Q 1 Commun SING sssrin a tire en nissan ne entries nantes nis een Q 2 Private Eg motonumanmmmma om Q 2 MIS Parameters oare E E R Q 3 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB s axvrunnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr Q 4 MIB POFAINCLElS riian EA O O 5 MIB Traps siiin aaa a a a Q 18 General siririrka sonnn n N N a ES EE Q 18 Trap Paramelers sv calvesisis cesdscvinnesvusiecaticcsinusvoreasenk seed sovstade snd desd naaa naia Q 19 Lith Manager Taps sisi vx sdavtscassads ona doveeubeastecxassnncadadaxiaxad send remit ea Q 22 Appendix R External Alarms Specification External Alarms Spel lfueuamagaaeaemsneseieeeeiu l ken R 1 IDO C AIGINS REE a a een R 1 IDU EAL AIGHINS mais sus se vannetedenes ih een enr ned s sms AE N E E Aaa A R 2 POEB AIINS isisisi a a a Ea E aE aana R 3 Appendix S Reserved Appendix T Regional Notice French Canadian Procedures den sinnani a a T 1 E EE E A E E E A eine doc T 1 Mise
230. nsult GE MDS Customer Support 8 Click the band required Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 E 3 The procedure Appendix E amp Change Band Select a band from the list below Band Description Installation Frequency GHz 5 150 5 335 GHz Universal 5 280 6 475 5 720 GHz Universal 5 580 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC default 5 780 5 835 5 865 GHz WPC 5 840 5 740 5 940 GHz Universal i 5 780 The fable contains common data from the and 8 sies Figure E 4 different band selected 9 The Change Band warning is displayed Click Yes to continue Change Band Changing the band will affect the Location site only Services will be stopped and device will be reset Note You should ensure that the attached antenna supports the required band Do you wish to continue Figure E 5 Change Band confirmation If you are changing the band on an installed link change the over the air site site B first otherwise you will lock yourself out of the link Caution The change which may take some time is carried out Please Wait Changing Band The result is reflected in the Link Manager main window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 E 4 Changing Band for DFS Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help g x X Ik Configuratior Installatic Site Location 2 Link Link Appendix E EEK Get Diagnostics Location Site1 Site2 Lig
231. nt Link Password Inventory Security Date amp Time Hk lar e Advanced ad Ethernet a TDM Services T External Alarms Link Password Value I Operations Cancel j Apply The Link Lock check box is now unavailable 5 If required repeat the procedure for Site B To revert the Link Lock status to unlocked power down each ODU in turn Use the above procedure to uncheck the Link Lock status box for the live ODU A simple ODU reset at either end will restore the link to its previous locked or unlocked state Setting the Date and Time S No te The ODU maintains a date and time The date and time should be synchro nized with any Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 compatible server During power up the ODU attempts to configure the initial date and time using an NTP Server If the server IP address is not configured or is not reachable a default time is set When configuring the NTP Server IP address you should also configure the offset from the Universal Coordinated Time UTC If there is no server available you can either set the date and time or you can set it to use the date and time from the managing computer Note that manual setting is not recommended since it will be overridden by a reset power up or synchroni zation with an NTP Server The NTP uses UDP port 123 If a firewall is configured between the ODU and the NTP Server this port must be opened
232. nvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnennnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 9 6 FIGURE 9 8 REMOTE INTERNAL LOOPBACK 1 vuvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 9 6 FIGURE 9 9 REMOTE EXTERNAL LOOPBACK annnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnannnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn 9 7 FIGURE 9 10 LOCAL INTERNAL LOOPBACK anuvnnvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 9 7 FIGURE 9 11 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX aunnvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennen 9 9 FIGURE 9 12 BASIC PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT avunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 9 10 FIGURE 9 13 A TYPICAL PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT aaunnannvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannene 9 10 FIGURE 9 14 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX cceccecsecevaueuveuseeauevauseueusavaueas 9 12 FIGURE 9 15 EVENTS LOG DISPLAY avarnunannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 9 14 FIGURE 9 16 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX EVENT TAB uvunnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 9 16 FIGURE 9 17 ACTIVE ALARMS SUMMARY iaaunnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 9 17 FIGURE 9 18 RECENT EVENTS UP TO LAST 256 EVENTS AT SITE vissccecescavausesueeevaueas 9 18 FIGURE A 4 MOUNTING ON A POLE suuvannnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn A 2 FIGURE A 5 MOUNTING ON A WALL avannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen A 3 FIGURE B 1 FRESNEL ZONE reena keine bedra eueescdaveubencansteidane B 4 FIGURE B 2 ACC
233. o teams simultaneously at site A and at site B gt To align the ODUs using the alignment tone 1 Verify that power is connected to the IDUs at both sites When aligning the antennas do not stand in front of a live antenna Warning Provided that Site A detects the signal from Site B the ODU starts beep ing 20 seconds after power up and continues beeping until the ODUs are aligned and the installation is complete 2 Verify normal operation of the IDU by the LED indications on the front panel see Table 3 2 3 Direct the antenna of site B in the direction of the site A This is simplified if a previous site survey has been completed and azimuths are known 4 Make an azimuth sweep of 180 degrees with the site A ODU so that the strongest signal from site B can be detected 5 Slowly turning the site A ODU back towards the position of Site B listen to the tone until the best signal is reached See the following figure for audible signal variations Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 15 Connecting and Aligning ODUs Antennas Chapter 3 SU BUZZER SIGNAL BESTSOFAR HEN INCREASED W SAME E DECREASED NN NO AIR LINK 190 HSS MISMATCH HSE Figure 3 18 Beep Sequence for antenna alignment ANTENNA ALIGNMENT e Three beeps and a pause is best signal so far e Two beeps and a pause is signal quality increased e One beep and pause is no change in signal e Long beep and short
234. oldest is 30 wbbOduPerfMonDayUAS RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per interval of 24 hours wbbOduPerfMonDayES RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours wbbOduPerfMonDaySES RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours wbbOduPerfMonDayBBE RO Current number of Background Block Errors per interval of 24 hours wbbOduPerfMonDaylntegrity RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval of 24 hours wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrTable N A This table defines keeps the air counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrEntry N A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrMinRSL 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 1 Integer RO Current Min Received Level Reference starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrMaxRSL 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 2 Integer RO Current Max Received Level Reference starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThresh1Exc 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 3 Gauge RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level eed exceeded the RSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThresh2Exc 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 4 Gauge RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level eed exceeded the RSL2 threshold in the last 15 minutes wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrMinTSL 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 5 Integer RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level starting from the presen
235. on K 16 MIB About Q 1 Community String Q 2 Interface API Q 1 Parameters Q 3 Private Q 2 Private Parameters Q 5 Reference Q 1 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 Q 4 TDM Q 3 Terminology Q 1 Traps Q 18 Monitored Hot Standby see MHS O ODU 1 7 Bridge Mode aging time 8 15 Connectorized 1 7 1 7 described 1 6 Differences between models 1 8 Installation Mast and Wall A 1 Integrated Antenna 1 7 1 7 mounting 1 7 Mounting Kit A 1 Package Contents 3 3 Preloading IP address D 1 Replacing 9 20 Typically used external antennas 1 12 With integrated antenna 1 12 Outdoor PoE see O PoE 1 11 Outdoor Unit see ODU P Package contents of 3 3 Password Link 9 20 PC Minimum Requirements 4 1 Performance Monitor 9 2 Performance Monitoring set time interval 9 8 PoE Described 1 11 Wireless Link User Manual Release1 9 Installing a link using Ports LAN for PoE 8 Protection External Lightning Surge Suppressors Grounding Antenna cable IDUs ODUs Internal ESD Protection circuits R Radio Link Accessories 3 14 O 2 C 1 C 2 C 2 C 7 1 14 Additional Tools and Materials Required 3 6 Connecting user equipment 3 14 Documentation set 1 15 Hardware Installation External Antennas 3 8 Indoor 3 9 Lightning protection 3 9 Mounting U 3 10 ODU 3 8 Outdoor 3 8 Outdoor connections 3 9 Sequence 3 6 Package Contents 3 3 IDU 3 4 ODU 3 3 Package contents External Antennas 3 6 Regional Notice French Canadian T 1 Replaci
236. on Wizard Not Chapter 5 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Table 6 2 Link Manager main menu functionality Continued Performance Monitoring Report On screen and printable 1 lt Site 1 name gt Shows active alarms for lt Site 1 name gt Chapter 6 Information Active Alarms in did 2 lt Site 2 names Shows active alarms for lt Site 1 name gt Recent Events Displays recent events by site Software Upgrade Upgrade ODU firmware Appendix F Tools Spectrum View Not available for Wireless Link Change Band 7 Installer only Change the link band Appendix E Change Password Change the log on password dialog page 4 9 Clear Events Clear local events log Events Log page 9 16 Save to File Save events log file Preferences Local preferences dialog Clear counters Clear TDM counters Loopbacks Set TDM loopbacks page 9 3 1 lt Site 1 name gt Reset lt Site 1 name gt ODU Maintenance Reset 2 lt Site 2 name gt Reset lt Site 2 name gt ODU Link Manager Help View online version of the User Manual Link Budget Calculator opened in default browser Appendix B Calculator Help Get Diagnostics Obtain system information page 9 1 About Link Manager Manager build and system information Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Link details pane The Link details pane on the left is split into three sections
237. onHighTrafficThreshKbps RW When the current traffic is above this threshold wbbOduAgnGenAddTrapExt 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 1 1 Integer RW If yes is chosen wbbOduAgnGenSetMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 1 2 Integer RW This parameter is reserved to the element manager provided with the product wbbOduAgnNTPCfgTimeServerIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 2 1 IpAddress RW IP address of the server from which the current time is loaded wbbOduAgnNTPCfgTimeOffsetFromUTC 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 2 2 Integer RW Offset from Coordinated Universal Time minutes Possible values 1440 1440 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 13 MIB Parameters Appendix Q Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 10 of 14 Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbbOduAgnRealTimeAndDate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 2 3 OctetString RW This parameter specifies the real time and date Format YYYY MM DD Hexadecimal A date time specification field octets contents range 1 1 2 year 0 65536 2 3 month 1 12 3 4 day 1 31 4 5 hour 0 23 5 6 minutes 0 59 6 7 seconds 0 60 use 60 for leap second 7 8 deci seconds 0 9 For example Tuesday May 26 1992 at 1 30 15 PM EDT would be displayed as 07 c8 05 1a Od 1e Of 00 1992 5 26 13 30 15 wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmLastChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 1 Integer RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset and is incremente
238. orted with any mix of Wireless Link and Wireless Mux links Wireless Mux can be used to backhaul Wireless Link collocated links without mutual interference gt gt Monitored Hot Standby 1 1 The Monitored Hot Standby supports up to four E1 T1 services with Wireless Link and up to sixteen E1 T1 services with Wireless Mux It is designed to provide high reliability high capacity Point to Point Links The Hot Standby Link is e Designed to provide redundancy and high reliability for carrier class operators e Optimized for high capacity links operating in license free bands Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 1 Key Applications Chapter 1 e A comprehensive solution providing protection against both equipment failure and loss of air interface by simple connectiv ity between a primary link and a secondary link The main features of the Hot Standby Link are e Cut over from the primary to the secondary link completely automatic e Cut over time no more than 50 ms e Automatic restore to primary link as soon as it becomes avail able e Wireless Link can backup a Wireless Mux link gt gt Video Surveillance The Video Surveillance product is GE MDS newest addition to its Access level portfolio It provides an affordable asymmetric link using 2 Mbps channel from the base site to the camera site and 5 Mbps channel from the camera site to the base site It uses two ODUs and two PoE devices gt gt Multiple Hop redundanc
239. panel antenna with a gain of 16dBi and 20 beam width The radio and the antenna are housed in a weatherproof case as a single unit ODU with integrated antenna w Figure 1 20 ODU with integrated antenna side and front views Various external antennas are available for the Wireless Link operating fre quencies Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 12 Link Manager Chapter 1 Flat Panel Antennas I The Flat Panel antenna shown in Figure 1 21 is available as an integrated or external antenna Flat panel antennas are suitable for short range typically in Access applications They are relatively cheap use comparatively lit tle tower space and are robust under extreme weather conditions i Figure 1 21 External antennas Flat Panel Parabolic Dish Antennas nn l The Parabolic dish antenna is a high gain reflector antenna used for radio television and data communi cations The relatively short wavelength of electro magnetic radio energy at these frequencies allows reasonably sized reflectors to exhibit the very desir able highly directional response for both receiving and transmitting Figure 1 22 External antennas Parabolic Dish Grid Antennas l Grid antennas are used for 2 4 GHz applications tri Due to the large size the grid design minimizes weight and wind loading Figure 1 23 External antennas Grid Antenna HL HI ly Ii See the products catalog for offerings of external an
240. pendent A change is effective after link re synchronization wbbOduAirDesiredRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 2 Integer RW Deprecated parameter wbbOduAirSSID 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product wbbOduAirTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 4 Integer RW Required Transmit power in dBm This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation The min and max values are product specific A change is effective immediately wbbOduAirSesState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 5 Integer RO Current Link State The value is active 3 during normal operation wbbOduAirMstrSlv 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 6 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the device was automatically selected into the radio link master or slave The value is undefined if there is no link wbbOduAirResync 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 8 Integer RW Setting this parameter to 1 will cause the link to restart the synchronization process wbbOduAirRxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 1 Integer RO Received Signal Strength in dBm wbbOduAirTotalFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 2 Counter RO Total Number of received radio frames wbbOduAirBadFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 3 Counter RO Total number of received radio frames with CRC error wbbOduAirCurrentRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 4 Integer RO Deprecated parameter Actual rate of the air interface in Mbps For Channel Bandwidt
241. place an ODU for primary or secondary link at either site e Install the pre configured ODU Since the other link is working normally nothing need be done with it If the secondary ODU was replaced TDM service remains as is on the primary link If the primary ODU was replaced then the TDM service will shift back to the primary link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 11 Monitoring the Links Appendix K Monitoring the Links If the Link Manager is logged in to a link you cannot run a second copy of it simply by clicking its desktop icon It is assumed that your running copy of the Link Manager is logged into the primary link gt To setup a Link Manager desktop icon for the secondary link 1 Using copy and paste create a copy of the Link Manager icon on your desktop 2 Right click it to get the properties menu You should see something simi lar to this Link Manager Properties General Shortcut Compatibility Security mH RoboSource es Link Manager Target type Application Target location Link Manager Target fram Files WBBLink ManagerLinkManager exe Start in Shortcut key None Run Normal window Comment 3 Scroll to the end of the Target field and outside the inverted commas add a space followed by the IP address of Site 1 2 for the secondary link If for example it is 10 0 0 125 the above Target field would look like C Program Files WBB WBB Manager WBBManager exe
242. pplication Figure 1 3 Typical WiFi Backhaul Application Video Surveillance Wireless Link wireless broadband systems allow organizations and system integrators to deploy video cameras virtually anywhere while elimi nating the costs and installation hassles of wire based systems Reliable robust and affordable the Wireless Link systems support a variety of trans Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 3 Private Networks Chapter 1 mission topologies such as Ring Star and Daisy Chain to provide surveil lance coverage of the most challenging environments Figure 1 4 Multi Point to Point Video Surveillance Deployment Private Networks Wireless Link is the perfect solution for private networks such as enter prises education government and utility organizations that want to own and control their networks and eliminate the high recurring charges for leased lines cable GE MDS cost effective solution enables organizations of all types to connect geographically dispersed buildings at ranges of up to 80 Km 50 miles Figure 1 5 Private Network Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 4 Key Features of Wireless Link Chapter 1 Figure 1 6 Multi Point to Point Enterprise Connectivity Key Features of Wireless Link The following represents some of the outstanding features that Wireless Link provides gt gt gt gt TDM Ethernet in one Solution Wireless Link systems deliver car
243. quired Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode The ODU Ethernet port is configured to auto detect by default and may not be changed The ODU Ethernet port mode is configurable for line speed 10 100BaseT and duplex mode half or full duplex An Auto Detect feature is provided whereby the line speed and duplex mode are detected automatically using auto negotiation Use manual con figuration when attached external equipment does not support auto negoti ation The default setting is Auto Detect You should not reconfigure the port that is used for the managing computer connection since a wrong configuration can cause a management disconnection or Ethernet services interruption Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 15 Setting the Maximum Information Rate Chapter 8 gt To configure the Ethernet Mode 1 From the Configuration menu choose the site to configure The Site Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click Advanced Ethernet 3 In the Ethernet Ports Configuration pane use the drop down menu to choose the configuration 4 Click Apply to save the changes It is possible to close the Ethernet service by disconnecting the Ethernet port If you close the port you may subsequently be unable to access the E device If this should occur a workaround is as follows Note e Connect the system from the remote site e Connect via other Ethernet port of the IDU e Power down the equipment and connect immedi
244. r 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 22 Integer RO Minimum Transmit power in dBm wbbOduAirMaxTxPowerTable N A Table of Maximum transmit power per air rate wbbOduAirMaxTxPowerEntry N A Maximum Transmit power table entry INDEX wbbOduAirMaxTxPowerlndex wbbOduAirMaxTxPowerlndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 23 1 1 Integer RO Air interface rate index wbbOduAirMaxTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 23 1 2 Integer RO Maximum Transmit power in dBm wbbOduAirChannelBandwidth 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 24 Integer RW Channel bandwidth in KHz A change is effective after reset wbbOduAirChannelBWTable N A Channel Bandwidths table wbbOduAirChannelBWEntry N A Channel Bandwidth table entry INDEX wbbOduAirChannelBWindex wbbOduAirChannelBWIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 25 1 1 Integer RO Channel Bandwidth index wbbOduAirChannelBWAvail 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 25 1 2 Integer RO Channel Bandwidth availability wbbOduAirChannelsAdminState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 25 1 3 DisplayString RO Channels availability per CBW wbbOduAirRFD 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 26 Integer RO Current radio frame duration in microseconds wbbOduAirRates Table N A Air Rate indexes table for current channel bandwidth wbbOduAirRatesEntry N A Air Rate indexes table entry INDEX wbbOduAirRatesindex wbbOduAirRatesindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 27 1 1 Integer RO Air Rate index wbbOduAirRatesAvail 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 27 1 2 Integer RO Air
245. r the second link 4 If you are using a BDU you should refer to the Base Distribution Unit User Manual Connecting User Equipment gt To connect user equipment to an IDU 1 Connect user switch router or any other compatible device to the IDU panel RJ 45 ports designated LAN For an IDU C see item C in Figure 3 13 above 2 Connect user E1 T1 traffic to the IDU panel RJ 45 ports designated TRUNKS For an IDU C see labeled item L in Figure 3 13 above 3 IDU C only To use the SFP Port labeled item D in Figure 3 13 above insert an SFP plug in module into the port and connect the user switch router or any other compatible device to the SFP plug in module Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 14 Connecting and Aligning ODUs Antennas Chapter 3 Refer to Appendix K for connector pinouts lin S Do not connect two LAN ports to the same network or flooding may occur Note gt To connect user equipment to a PoE device e Connect a user switch router or any other compatible device to the PoE device RJ 45 port designated LAN IN Refer to Appendix K for connec tor pinouts Connecting and Aligning ODUs Antennas You perform antenna alignment using the ODU s audible tone The method is not suitable for the following models BRS Appendix I FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Appendix H AIND Appendix G To speed up the installation time alignment of a Wireless Link system should be performed by tw
246. raffic received and transmit ted rates per site in Mbps of Fps selectable in the panel tile bar Current Ethernet bandwidth available Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps amp Fps Ethernet Service Estimated Throughput Mbps 0 0 0 0 The green scale will be changed according to the Current Ethernet Maximum Ethernet bandwidth bandwidth available available at the used Air rate Figure 6 2 Ethernet Throughput Indication e TDM Services IDU C TDM Service Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current Estimated Time Between Errors se RSR se HR Error Blocks E1 Ports e The title bar enables you to switch between Accumulative and Current view e Immediately below the title bar is displayed the Estimated Time Between Errors It is zeroed by the Clear Counters button in the tool bar e Error block count is shown immediately above the active TDM channels display e The color of the TDM ports reflects their current status e Green Operational e Red Error LOS for loss of signal and AIS for Alarm Indi cation Signal e Yellow loopback e TDM Services IDU E R Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 6 6 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors see mn SE se mn SE ist Trunk Nor mal Nor mal Errors Blocks 0 0 2nd Trunk Normal Normal Errors Blocks 0 0 e Immediately below the title bar is displayed the Est
247. reason the default band needs to be changed it should be done before link installation Caution e Use of an incorrect band may be in violation of local regulations Required Equipment The minimal equipment required to change an ODU default band is e Laptop computer managing computer satisfying the requirements of Table 4 1 e An installed copy of the Link Manager e A PoE device e A crossed Ethernet LAN cable e An IDU ODU cable The procedure m The following procedure is generic to all relevant GE MDS radio products What S amp S you see on your running Link Manager may differ in some details from the Ote screen captures used to illustrate this Appendix Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 E 1 The procedure Appendix E gt To change the factory default band 1 Using the IDU ODU cable connect the PoE device to the ODU ensuring that the cable is plugged into the PoE port marked P LAN OUT 2 Connect the Poe device to AC power 3 Using a crossed LAN cable connect the LAN IN port of the PoE device to the Ethernet port of the managing computer The ODU will commence beeping at about once per second indicating correct operation 4 Launch the Link Manager 5 Log on as Installer Login E IP Address 1921682100 Password ec User Type Installer Community Read Only ss ReadWiite eecccccccce Figure E 1 Becoming Installer 6 Enter the default password wireless
248. redefined intervals You can save the monitor log to a text file as well as display the information in an on screen report Saving the Monitor Log You can save the recorded Monitor Log statistics to a text file gt To save the monitor log 1 From the Tools menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog box appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 8 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 Preferences Monitor Events Advanced Monitor File File C l ings Default User My Documents Monitor tat LJ Interval 1 Sec l Cancel Figure 9 11 Preferences dialog box 2 Click the Monitor Tab 3 Select the file to save 4 Click the check box to open the file for saving 5 Click the l button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which folder and under what name the monitor log file is to be saved 6 Set the time interval for adding data to the file 7 Click OK to save the file Viewing Performance Reports The Performance Monitor Report displays performance views of each of the interfaces gt To obtain performance monitoring reports 1 From the main menu choose Tools Performance Monitoring Report You are presented with the following window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 9 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 4 Performance Monitoring Report File View Configuration Help gt amp Get Data Thresholds Selection Pane Close Interface v dir Ethern
249. reless Link ODU s e Wireless Link Access e Wireless Link VS Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 7 The Outdoor Unit ODU Chapter 1 e Wireless Link e Wireless Link High End The following table shows the differences between the four systems Table 1 1 ODU Series Typical Characteristics Max Ethernet Throughput 2Mbps 2 5 Mbps 18Mbps 18Mbps Max Range 20Km 20Km 80Km 80Km Supported IDU pog PoE PoE and IDU PoE and IDU devices Services Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet and TDM re and HSS Yes Yes No Yes Tx Power 18 dBm 18dBm 18 dBm 25 dBm The Wireless Link ODUs come is many variations reflecting supported com binations of regulations and frequency bands as shown in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Wireless Link Frequency Bands And Radio Regulations 2 3 GHz 2 302 2 397 2 4 GHz 2 402 2 472 2 402 2 482 2 312 2 482 2 5 GHz 2 496 2 690 2 496 2 690 2 7 GHz 2 700 2 900 4 9 GHz 4 940 4 990 4 940 4 990 5 3 GHz 5 250 5 350 5 170 5 330 5 140 5 345 5 4 GHz 5 475 5 720 5 490 5 710 5 475 5 720 5 8 GHz 5 730 5 845 5 725 5 875 5 825 5 875 5 730 5 845 5 725 5 845 5 9 GHz 5 730 5 950 6 0 GHz 5 795 6 030 Key to abbreviations e FCC Federal Communications Commission e IC Canadian radio regulation e ETSI European Telecommunicayions Standards Institute e IDA Indian WPC radio regulatio
250. reless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Installation Chapter 5 Services Configuration TDM Type E1 TDM Ports 1 3 oe ey ed leu 2 4 Maximum Available Services 4xE1 Ethernet Select 0 Clear All Selected 0 Remaining 4 Figure 5 10 TDM service port selection 3 Use the spin button to choose consecutive service ports the Select Maximum button to choose all available ports n e Ethernet is always selected S amp S e The maximum available services will be reduced in accordance with ote actual air interface capacity Services Configuration TDM Ports Maximum Available Services 4xE1 Ethernet f al Select 3 4 Select Maximum Clear All Selected 3 Remaining 1 Figure 5 11 TDM Service port selection seven services selected 4 Click OK You are returned to the Services and rates dialog of Figure 5 13 It is updated to reflect your choice Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 10 Installation Wireless Link User Manual Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration TOM littes amp Chapter 5 a Services Rate Mbps Configure Distance oKm 0 Miles IDU A Product 7 C 04 B000 HW Version 3 SW Version 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 B 7 C 04 B000 3 1 9 00_b3065_Jun 7 2009 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 5 12 Services and Rates Services chosen Modula
251. rges To provide an alternate Lightning Discharge path the ODU and antenna grounding posts should be connected to ground point by a 10 AWG short copper wire The device should be permanently connected to ground IDU Grounding The IDUS grounding post should be connected to the internal ground point using a grounding wire of at least 10 AWG The grounding wire should be connected to a grounding rod or the building grounding system The device should be permanently connected to ground Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 C 2 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix C External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding A Grounding Kit and Surge Arrestor Unit must be located near the ODU and properly grounded as illustrated in Figures C 2 and C 3 below ODU FE BB Ground to tower Surge Arrestor Ground connections are within 30 cm ODU IDU CAT 5e cable Surge Arrestor Ground Figure C 2 Grounding a typical pole installation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix C Ground connection within 30 cm Surge Arrestor ODU IDU CAT 5e cable Surge Arrestor Grounding cable IDU Ground Figure C 3 Grounding a typical wall installation The next figure shows a close up of the rear of grounded ODU N Pole Ground Point To Antennas Surge Arrestor Andrew Ground Lug rear Grounding Kits
252. rier class TDM Ethernet over one platform making them ideal for a range of backhaul and access applications Simple Installation Wireless Link systems are extremely simple to install and maintain and are typically up and running in less than an hour Advanced Air Interface The Wireless Link system design incorporates an exceptionally robust air interface based on patented technologies The unique air interface protocol of Wireless Link is designed to ensure non stop high quality transmission even when encountering interference and harsh conditions Automatic Adaptive Rate Automatic Adaptive Rate is a method of dynamically adapting the transmitted rate by changing both the signal modulation and coding Automatic Adaptive rate optimizes the data throughput according to interference conditions to optimize data throughput while maintain ing service quality Unique Multi Point to Point Deployment GE MDS Wireless Link products can be installed in a unique multi point to point architecture Multiple units are deployed in one hub site location from where they provide a dedicated high capacity connection to each remote site This unique concept builds on Hub Site Synchronization HSS feature which synchronizes the transmission of collocated Wireless Link and Wireless Mux units thus virtually reducing mutual interfer ence commonly experienced with collocated TDD radios Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 5 Wireless
253. ription wbblduAdmHwRev 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 2 DisplayString RO IDU Hardware Revision wbblduAdmSwRev 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 3 DisplayString RO IDU Software Revision wbbOduAdmNumOfExternalAlarmin 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 4 Integer RO Indicates the number of currently available External Alarm Inputs wbbOduAdmExternAlarminTable N A This is the External Alarm Inputs table wbbOduAdmExternAlarminEntry N A Entry containing the elements of a single External Alarm Input INDEX wbbOduAdmExternAlarminindex wbbOduAdmExternAlarminindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 5 1 1 Integer RO This value indicates the index of the External Alarm Input entry wbbOduAdmExternAlarminText 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 5 1 2 DisplayString RW This field describes the External Alarm Input It is an optional string of no more than 64 characters wbbOduAdmExternAlarminAdminState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 5 1 3 Integer RW This value indicates if this External Alarm Input is enabled or disabled wbbOduAdmExternAlarminStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 5 1 4 Integer RO This value indicates the current status of the External Alarm Input wbblduAdmSN 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 6 DisplayString RO IDU Serial Number wbblduAdmlduDetectionMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 7 Integer RW The parameter defines whether to send Ethernet frames to detect an IDU The valid writable values are userDisabled 3 wbblduAdmMountedTrunks RO Number of mounted trunks in the IDU wbbld
254. ription 1 Description Link Password has been changed at on s s Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link externalAlarmInPort1Clear 205 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port 1 is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 1 lt User Text gt Alarm Cleared externalAlarmInPort2Clear 206 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port 2 is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 2 lt User Text gt Alarm Cleared lanPort1Clear 209 normal Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to connected Contains two parameters 1 Description LAN port 1 status changed to connected s2 s Is the Eth mode speed amp duplex lanPort2Clear 210 normal Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to connected Contains two parameters 1 Description LAN port 2 status changed to connected s 2 s Is the Eth mode speed amp duplex Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 21 Link Manager Traps Table Q 3 MIB Traps Sheet 4 of 4 Appendix Q Name Severity Description mngPortClear 211 normal Indicates the management port status changed to connected Contains two parameters 1 Description Management port status changed to connected s2 s Is the
255. rms Close Closes the active alarm window Viewing Recent Events Each ODU stores the last 256 events Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 17 Reverting Alert Messages Chapter 9 gt To view the last 256 events 1 Click Tools Recent Events window like the following is dis played BS Recent Events A File View Help A V Save Site Close Number Device Date amp Time Description Interface 01 09 2005 00 00 02 Channel scanning in progress Radio Interface 01 09 2005 00 00 28 IDU of type 16xTrunks was detected 01 09 2005 00 00 28 TDM Interface 1 LOS E1 Port 01 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 TDM Interface 2 LOS E1 Port 02 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 TDM Interface 3 LOS E1 Port 03 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 TDM Interface 4 LOS E1 Port 04 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 LAN port 01 status changed to connected 100Mbps Full Duplex Management Port on Ddu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 LAN port 02 status changed to disconnected LAN Port 01 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 SFP port 01 status changed to disconnected SFP Port 01 on Idu 29 06 2009 16 51 56 The time was set to MON JUN 29 16 51 56 2009 Figure 9 18 Recent Events Up to last 256 events at Site A 2 Use the Site button to choose Site B 3 Use the Save button to store the events in a tab delimited list Reverting Alert Messages Many alert messages in the Link Manager have an option of the form Do not show this message again These ale
256. rnal alarm inputs restore factory settings set IDU detection mode Functions at the top of the dialog box Backup Save the current configuration to a file Restore Restore the link configuration from a backup file created by the backup Refresh Refresh current panel with latest values Installation Mode Return to Installation Mode for the entire link Selecting the Mute check box before clicking the Install Mode button mutes the Beeper Buzzer Mutes the alignment tone in installation mode Reactivate the beeper during alignment Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 2 Viewing System Details Chapter 8 gt To edit the Configuration Parameters 1 Click the required site button on the main tool bar of the Link Manager OR Click Configuration from the main menu and choose a site to config ure The Configuration dialog box opens see Figure 8 1 above 2 Choose the appropriate item in the left hand list to open a dialog box 3 Click Apply to save changes In subsequent instructions we will simply say Choose a site to configure on the understanding that the foregoing procedure is implied Viewing System Details This is the first window displayed as depicted above You can edit the con tact details and site names Viewing Air Interface Details Click the Air Interface item in the left hand list A window similar to the fol lowing appears Site Configuration A File Actions Help ki Backup
257. rofessionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities Failure to do so may expose the end Warning User or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities GE MDS and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas E The material in this chapter is generic to all GE MDS radio link products unless stated otherwise ote Safety Practices Preventing overexposure to RF energy To protect against overexposure to RF energy install the ODUS so as to pro vide and maintain minimal separation distances from all persons When the system is operational avoid standing directly in front of the antenna Strong RF fields are present when the transmitter is on The ODU must not be deployed in a location where it is possible for people to stand or walk inadvertently in front of the antenna Grounding All products should be grounded during operation In addition e The ODU should be earthed by a wire with diameter of at least 12AWG The Wireless Link ODU must be properly grounded to protect against lightning It is the user s responsibility to install the Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 1 Protection against Lightning Chapter 3 equipment in accordance with Section 810 of the National Electric Code ANSI NFPA No 70 1984
258. ropriate wire gauge and type keeping the wire as short as possible less than 1m 3 between the stud and the site grounding point 7 Replace the cover Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 C 6 Internal ESD Protection circuits Appendix C To ODU ODU IDU CAT5e cable Pole Ground Point Surge Arrestor Ground Lug rear To IDU Figure C 6 Surge Suppressor and grounding at building entry point Internal ESD Protection circuits This equipment is designed to meet the ETSI FCC Aus NZ CSA EMC and Safety requirements To fulfill these requirements the system s Telecom lines at the ODU IDU are Transformer isolated and include internal ESD Electro Static Discharge Protection circuits Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 C 7 Appendix D Preloading an ODU with an IP Address Why this is Needed All ODUs supplied by GE MDS come pre configured with an IP address of 10 0 0 120 For use in a network the ODUs must be configured with suit able static IP addresses The method for doing this under office conditions is set out in Chapter 5 This appendix explains how do achieve the same thing in the field Required Equipment The minimal equipment required to pre load an ODU with an IP address is e Laptop computer managing computer satisfying the requirements of Table 4 1 e An installed copy of the Link Manager e A PoE device e A crossed Ethernet LAN cable e An IDU ODU cable e If you have connectorized ODUs
259. rors starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonCurrintegrity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 5 Integer RO Indicates the integrity of the entry wbbOduPerfMonintervalTable N A This table defines keeps the counters of the last day in resolution of 15 min intervals wbbOduPerfMonintervalEntry N A This is an entry in the Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonIntervalldx RO This table is indexed per interval number Each intervalis of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonintervalUAS RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per interval wbbOduPerfMonintervalES RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval wbbOduPerfMonintervalSES RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval wbbOduPerfMonintervalBBE RO Current number of Background Block Errors per interval wbbOduPerfMonintervalintegrity RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval wbbOduPerfMonDayTable N A This table defines keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonDayEntry N A This is an entry in the Days Table INDEX iflndex Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 10 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 7 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description Q o 7 wbbOduPerfMonDayldx RO This table is indexed per interval number Each intervalis of 24 hours and the
260. rosoft Corp C Documents and Settings vera gt ping 16 6 6 6 128 with 32 bytes of data 10 0 0 120 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 63 10 0 0 120 bytes 32 time 3ms TTL 63 10 0 0 120 byte 2 time 3ms TTL 63 10 0 0 120 hytes 32 time 3ms TTL 63 Ping statistics for 10 0 0 120 Sent 4 Received 4 Lost z loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds 3ms Maximum 6ms Average 3ms Packets Minimum C Documents and Settings vera gt Figure 4 2 Pinging an uninstalled and unconfigured link Any other response from ping means that the ODU is not responding Check your Ethernet connection and that both the IDU and ODU are switched on and then try again If you do not succeed seek assistance from GE MDS Customer Support 3 Dismiss the command line session 4 Double click the Link Manager icon on the desktop or click Start Pro grams Link Manager Link Manager The Log on dialog box appears IP Address Local Connection Password Figure 4 3 First time log on window The Link Manager log on Concept The Link Manager provides three levels of access in one of two entry modes To see them click Options at any time in the Log on window Figure 4 3 above You are offered an extended log on window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 3 The Link Manager log on Concept IP Address Password Link Manager fersjon 8 3 05 Build 8353 User Type Community
261. roups e Public RFC 1213 MIB II variables RFC 1214 MIB II System and Interfaces sections e Private Controlled by GE MDS and supplements the public group This appendix describes the public and private MIB used by GE MDS Terminology The following terms are used in this appendix MIB Management Information Base API Application Programming Interface SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol In addition the MIB uses internally the older notions of Local site and Remote site where this manual would use site A and site B To avoid burdening the reader this appendix will follow the MIB usage Interface API Control Method The Link Manager application provides all the means to configure and mon itor a Wireless Link link communicating with the SNMP agent in each ODU Each SNMP agent contains data on each of the IDUs and ODUs in the link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 1 Community String Appendix Q Both agents communicate with each other over the air using a proprietary protocol in S Each ODU has a single MAC address and a single IP address Note To control and configure the device using the MIB you should adhere to the following rules e The connection for control and configuration is to the local site over any SNMP UDP IP network e All Parameters should be consistent between both of the ODUs Note that inconsistency of air parameters can break the air connection To
262. rt messages can be reverted to their default state shown by choosing the Advanced tab from the Prefer ences dialog amp Preferences Monitor Events Advanced Alerts Restore Alerts Check for Updates v Enable Check for Updates Just click the Restore Defaults button followed by OK Remote Power Fail Indication Remote power fail indication indicates to one side that the other side has suffered a power failure The failed site sends a final trap indication about the power loss just before powering off Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 9 18 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Chapter 9 A Dying Gasp circuit identifies the power failure at a minimum interval of 20 milliseconds before the ODU or IDU powers off During that interval a message notifying the power failure is sent to opposite site External alarm output number 4 indicates power failure at the opposite site Use the following table to troubleshoot LED fault indications Table 9 7 LED fault indicators PWR Off Check that power is connected to the IDU IDU Red Check that the IDU ODU cable is properly wired and connected ODU Red Check that the IDU ODU cable is properly wired and connected Orange Complete the installation procedure from the Link Manager AIR I F Red Check the antenna alignment Check that the radio configuration of both site A and site B units are the same Channel and Link ID Oran
263. rvice Link Installation Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in a Link re synchronization Installation Channel GHz 5 720 ke Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 v Automatic Channel Selection Available Channels List GHz 5 740 5 755 5 770 5 785 5 800 5 815 5 745 5 760 5 775 5 790 5 805 5 820 5 750 5 765 5 780 5 795 5 810 5 825 Select All Clear All Monitor Link i Radio Interface A B RSS dem 46 46 Quality ig No Serv Ethernet Ethernet TDM No Sery Ethernet Ethernet TDM Figure 5 5 Channel Settings Automatic Channel Selection The default frequency for the product is shown Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 6 Installation Chapter 5 gt To select channels to be used by the link 1 Select the installation frequency from the Installation Channel box Link Installation Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in a Link re synchronization Installation Channel GHz 5 780 Channel Bandwidth MHz Automatic Channel Selectids Available Channels List GHz 5 740 5 755 5 770 5 785 5 800 5 815 5 745 5 760 5 775 5 790 5 805 5 820 5 750 5 765 5 780 5 795 5 810 5 825 lt i Select All Clear All gt Monitor Link Radio Interface A B RSS dem A No Serv Ethernet Ethemet TDM No Serv Ethernet Ethernet TDM Quality mm Figure 5 6 Channel Settings Showing available installation r
264. s detected The external pulse type detected is improper for TDM services A Software versions mismatch was detected wbblduSrvEthActive 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 12 Integer RO Represents the Ethernet service activation state wbblduSrvEthAvailable 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 13 Integer RO Represents the Ethernet service availability state wbblduSrvEthThroughput 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 14 Gauge RO Current available Ethernet service throughput in bps wbblduSrvEthMaxinfoRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 15 Integer RW Holds the maximum bandwidth kbps to be allocated for Ethernet service Value of zero means that Ethernet service works as best effort The maximum value is product specific Refer to the user manual wbblduSrvAvailableTrunksT1 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 16 Integer RO A bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be opened under T1 configuration The values take into account the IDU hardware configuration wbblduEthernetlfTable N A IDU Ethernet Interface table wbblduEthernetlfEntry N A IDU Ethernet Interface table entry INDEX wbblduEthernetlflndex wbblduEthernetlfindex RO If Index corresponding to this Interface wbblduEthernetlfAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 3 1 1 5 DisplayString RO IDU MAC address wbblduEthernetNumOfLanPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 3 3 Integer RO Number of LAN interfaces in the IDU wbblduEthernetNumOfSfpPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 3 4 Integer RO The number of SFP interfaces in the ID
265. s Link User Manual Release 1 9 Q 7 MIB Parameters Table Q 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 4 of 14 Appendix Q Name OID Type gt Description o 7 wbbOduAirChannelsOperState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 3 Integer RW Channel state Can be set by the user Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled A change is effective after link re synchronization Valid values disabled 0 wbbOduAirChannelsAvail 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 4 Integer RO Channel state Product specific and cannot be changed by the user Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled Valid values disabled 0 wbbOduAirChannelsDefaultFreq 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 5 Integer RO Default channel s availability for all CBWs The valid values are forbidden 0 wbbOduAirDfsState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 19 Integer RO Radar detection state Valid values disabled 0 wbbOduAirAutoChannelSelectionState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 20 Integer RO Deprecated parameter Indicating Automatic Channel Selection availability at current channel bandwidth Valid values disabled 0 wbbOduAirEnableTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 21 Integer RO Indicating Transmit power configuration enabled or disabled wbbOduAirMinTxPowe
266. s en utilisant des colliers clas ses UV 7 R p ter la proc dure sur le site distant Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 T 2 Connecter la terre IDU C Appendix T A Ne pas se placer en face d une ODU sous tension Prudence Connecter la terre IDU C Connecter un c ble de terre de 18 AWG la borne de masse de l appareil L appareil doit tre constamment connect la terre Les appareils sont pr vus pour tre install s par un personnel de service Les appareils doivent tre connect s une prise de courant avec une protection de terre e Le courant CC du IDU C doit tre fourni par l interm diaire d un disjoncteur bipolaire et le Prudence diam tre du c ble doit tre de 14 mm avec un conduit de 16 mm Installation sur pyl ne et mur L ODU ou l O POE peuvent tre mont s sur un pyl ne ou un mur Contenu du kit de montage ODU Le kit de montage ODU comprend les pi ces suivantes e une grande clame voir Figure T 1 e une petite clame voir Figure T 2 e un bras voir Figure T 3 e quatre visses hex t te M8x40 e deux visses hex t te M8x70 e quatre rondelles plates M8 e trois rondelles lastiques M8 e deux crous M8 Figure T 1 grande clame Figure T 2 petite clame Figure T 3 bras Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 T 3 Montage sur un pyl ne Appendix T Montage sur un pyl ne Kit d instalation DERCRENON 8 GUNNNTE fortes Astes bas tite bil stil ret
267. s or from factory settings mi service Q Cy e Reversion to installation mode requires a complete break in the link e Configuration mode may vary the service throughput and quality but without a service break Default Settings The default settings of the Wireless Link configuration parameters are listed in the second column of Table 4 4 below The third column shows the val ues we use in this manual for illustrative purposes Table 4 4 Default Settings Factory default band Product dependent 5 820GHz ODU IP Address 10 0 0 120 192 168 2 101 and 102 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Trap destination 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Link Manager log on passwords Observer admin Operator admin Installer wireless Link ID Link EBG_20561334 Link Name Name TPSF_BTT Site 1 Site A Site 2 Site B Location per site Location A B Name per site Name John Mary Contact per site Person Local Remote Link Password wireless bridge Rate Adaptive Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 10 Default Settings Chapter 4 Table 4 4 Default Settings Continued Ethernet Configuration Auto Detect Radio Link Failure Actions No action Bridge or Hub mode Hub Mode Aging time 300 sec Read write netman Community values Read only public Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 11 Chapter 5 Installing the Link Overview T
268. s supplied with bipolar antennas single cable supplied with monopolar antennas Mounting kit Additional Tools and Materials Required The following is a list of the equipment and materials required to install Wireless Link hardware Tools and Materials Crimping tool for RJ 45 if the ODU IDU cable is without connectors Spanner wrench 13 mm 12 Drill for wall mounting only Cable ties Sealing material Cables and connectors ODU grounding cable 12AWG IDU grounding cable 18AWG ODU IDU cable outdoor class CAT 5e 4 twisted pairs 24AWG For PoE based links A crossed Ethernet LAN cable O PoE 10AWG grounding cable if applicable BDU grounding cable 18AWG if applicable Hardware Installation Sequence The following steps are required to install the Wireless Link system Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 6 Hardware Installation Sequence Chapter 3 1 Mounting the ODUs page page 3 8 2 Mounting the external antennas if used page page 3 8 3 Mounting the Lightning Protection devices if used page page 3 9 4 Outdoor connections page page 3 9 5 Mounting the IDUs page page 3 10 6 Indoor connections page page 3 14 7 Aligning the ODUs antennas page page 3 15 See Figure 3 10 below which illustrates a typical installation of Wireless Link with an external antenna Antenna Coax cables grounded to the pole within 30 cm of the antenna Connectorized ODU Coax cables grounded to the pol
269. secondary link use different frequency channels If the air interface of the primary link is disturbed and cannot carry the required TDM service then the system automatically switches to the secon dary link In addition improved robustness and frequency planning flexibility is achieved as the primary and secondary air interfaces can operate in the same frequency band or in different frequency bands Automatic Channel Selection ACS can be configured for each link to add additional robustness Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 2 Purpose of this Appendix Appendix K The primary and secondary links are synchronized using Hub Site Synchro nization HSS It is recommended that both sites be installed with HSS cables If HSS fails at one site it can be operated from the other site by remote configuration Purpose of this Appendix This appendix is an installation and maintenance guide for MHS It applies to all radio products able to support the Monitored Hot Standby operational mode Who Should Read this This appendix is intended for persons responsible for the installation and maintenance of MHS To use it you need to know how to e Install a Wireless Link radio link e Install a Wireless Mux radio link e Use the Link Manager software MHS Kit Contents e One Y Connection Patch Panel e One MHS cable cs a CRETE 2 as 28 Figure K 2 Y Connection Patch Panel Installing an MHS The following procedure is
270. sing Local Connection but your physical connection is not local i e anything other than a direct connection between the managing computer and the IDU then any configuration you carry out may affect other links in the network You will not be able to do this Broadcast mode is not supported Warning e Network log on IP address to the ODU is recommended e If you log on via an over the air IP address you will receive a warn ing If you reset the site to which you are connected to factory set tings you can lock yourself out of the link e If you log on using Local Connection through a PoE device you will need to connect it to the managing computer using a crossed Ether net cable BS e The default IP address for the ODU is 10 0 0 120 The subnet mask is 255 0 0 0 e The actual IP address is defined during link configuration see Site Management IP Address and VLAN on page 8 7 See also Appendix D ote 6 If your User Type is not Operator then choose it now Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 5 Log on Errors Chapter 4 7 Enter the password 8 If you are a user with Read Write permission click Options to enter the Community options if required 9 For initial log on e Leave the default Community passwords netman for read write and public for read only e If Community values were previously defined enter them under Community in the Read Only or Read Write boxes e If you are a user
271. ss Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Transmitting on Channel 5 820 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 12 02 2009 10 25 46 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in Internal 000002 12 02 2009 10 25 47 Connected to Location Internal 000003 12 02 2009 10 35 05 Device unreachable Internal 000004 12 02 2009 10 35 12 Connected to Location Internal lt il 2 Connection Available Connection Mode Local IP Address 255 255 255 255 Figure D 7 Main Window after IP Address change 13 Click Cancel to leave the open Management dialog You may now exit the Link Manager or connect to another ODU If you choose to connect to another ODU after about a minute the main window of the Link Man agerwill revert to that shown in Figure D 2 above In any event power down the changed ODU the IP address change will take effect when you power it up again E Don t forget to remove the RF terminators from a connectorized ODU after Note powering it down Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 D 5 Changing the Factory Default Band Why this is Needed All ODUs supplied by GE MDS come pre configured with a factory default product dependent band according to the ODU part number For ODUs supporting Multi band it may be changed using the procedure in this appendix The procedure is generic applying to all ODUs with the Multi band feature e If for some
272. ssion User Manual Release 1 9 Appendix A Pole and Wall Installation ODU Mounting Kit Contents Table A 1 Bill of Materials ODU mounting kit Large Clamp see Figure A 1 1 Small Clamp see Figure A 2 1 Arm see Figure A 3 1 Screw hex head M8x40 4 Screw hex head M8x70 2 Washer flat M8 4 Washer spring M8 3 M8 Nuts 2 Figure A 1 Large Clamp Figure A 2 Small Clamp Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Figure A 3 Arm A 1 Mounting an ODU on a Pole Mounting an ODU on a Pole ODU Installation Kit ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY 1 Clamp 2 Screw hex head M8x40 Washer spring M8 Nut M8 Clamp Screw hex head M8x40 for 1 3 4 dia mast T 1 1 Washer flat M8 4 3 1 1 2 SAA Ww Screw hex head M8x70 2 9 for greater size of mast STEP 1 x2 Attach item 1 to the base mate knurled surfaces using items 2 3 4 5 as shown Va O 9 A 2 3 4 s Use tightening torque of 24 N m xe xe xe FOR MAST 1 3 4 3 J Tighten the antenna to the mast using item 6 screws and washers items 7 3 4 as shown Use tightening torque of 14 N m FOR MAST 1 1 3 4 gt x COO Figure A 4 Mounting on pole Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Appendix A Mounting an ODU on a Wall Mounting an ODU on a Wall ODU Appendix A Installation Kit ITEM DESCRIPTION Q Arm lt S
273. substantially generic to all GE MDS radio products E Differencences between Wireless Link and Wireless Mux class products will be stated explicitly What you see on your running Link Manager may differ ote in some details from the screen captures used to illustrate this Appendix Figure K 1 above is a schematic of an MHS Figure K 3 shows how to connect the IDUs to the Patch Panel Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 3 Installing an MHS Appendix K To user equipment Patch Panel ve PRE PANEL E1 T1 Cables RO es cea ahs MHS Cable 224 20 6 a a Figure K 3 How to connect the IDUs to the Patch Panel e With Wireless Mux links you can protect up to 16 TDM ports To pro n tect more than eight TDM ports use two Patch Panels at each site S amp S e Ethernet services are carried independently by primary and second Note ary links Each link carries different Ethernet traffic MHS does not protect Ethernet traffic In what follows it will be assumed that 1 We will depart from our usual Site A Site B conventions Sites A and B on the primary link will be Sites 1 2 and 1 4 respectively The corre sponding sites on the secondary link will be Sites 2 2 and 2 4 The site names reflect their IP addresses This is a useful convention and is reflected in the screen captures below 2 The link will be managed from Site 1 2 Site 1 4 may be a remote site 3 The links intended as the prim
274. t WBB Link Budget Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power R G58 FCC INT v Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Recommended antenna height 38 dBm 6 3 Watt 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles 46 Km 28 6 Miles Expected Performance 20 MHz M Auto v A 5 8 GHz 9 Mois BPSK a v 8 18 dBmc D dB LE dB dB 6 dB 48 km v I Good C 0 25 Ja 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only w 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only 15 Meter 49 Feet Figure B 6 RFP Selector RFP Table RFP 20MHz 10MHz 5MHz TDM Eth TDM Eth TDM Eth A BestBest Fit Fit B Best Fit Best Fit C Best Fit D Best E Fit Fit Fit Fit lt WBB B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Recommended antenna height 98 666 availability downtime 7012 min year WBB Link Budget 38 dBm 6 3 Watt 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles 46 Km 28 6 Miles R G58 FCC INT v 20 MHz yj Auto M 5 8 GHz
275. t Description o 7 wbblduTdmConfigindex RO Table index wbblduTdmlfindex RO Link index in the interface table wbblduTdmLineCoding 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 6 1 6 Integer RW This parameter applies to T1 trunks only The parameter controls the line coding Setting the value to each of the indices applies to all A change is effective after the next open of the TDM service wbblduTdmLoopbackConfig 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 6 1 9 Integer RW Loop back configuration table Each of the trunks can be set Normal wbblduTdmLineStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 6 1 10 Integer RO Line status wbblduTdmCurrentTable N A IDU TDM Links Statistics table wbblduTdmCurrentEntry N A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry INDEX wbblduTdmCurrentindex wbblduTdmCurrentindex RO Table index Same as wbblduTdmLinelndex wbblduTdmCurrentBlocks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 7 1 10 Counter RO Number of correct blocks transmitted to the line 1 wbblduTdmCurrentDrops 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 7 1 10 Counter RO Number of error blocks transmitted to the line 2 wbblduTdmCurrentTxClock 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 7 1 10 Integer RW TDM Transmit Clock A change is effective after 3 re activation of the TDM service wbblduTdmCurrentBlocksHigh 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 7 1 10 Counter RO High part of the 64 bits counter Current Blocks 4 wbblduTdmRemoteQual 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 8 Integer RO Estimated average interval between error second e
276. t 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrMaxTSL 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 6 Integer RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrTSLThresh1Exce 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 7 Gauge RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level ed exceeded the TSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrBBERThresh1Ex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 8 Gauge RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio ceed exceeded the BBER1 threshold in the last 15 minutes wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalTable N A This table defines keeps the air counters of the last day in resolution of 15 min intervals wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalEntry N A This is an entry in the Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonAirIntervalldx RO This table is indexed per interval number Each intervalis of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalMinRSL RO Current Min Received Level Reference per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirlntervalMaxRSL RO Current Max Received Level Reference per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalRSLThresh1E RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level xceed exceeded the RSL1 threshold per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalRSLThresh2E Number of seconds Receive Signal Level xceed exceeded the RSL2 thresholdACCESS read only per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalMinTSL RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalMaxTSL RO Current Max Transmit Sig
277. t 3 1 Protection against Lightning sivucivvcvsnscesvnesuvesvnaudeturedsetvertevecseeadvedsrdedensvensveess 3 2 ELSE AE EE Te 3 2 Package I RR 3 3 ODU PACA GO COM EM Serinin inaia E RE EAEE eie net i sons 3 3 IDU E of IDU R package containing sense nanenersenene a a a 3 4 IDU PACKAGE COneNtS mime ONEA EEEE 3 4 POE 8 Package Containing esene E EE 3 5 BDU PACKAGE COMES Game aE ERE A AEA 3 6 External Antenna Package Contents rvrrvavrvnnrvnnvvnnvnnrvrnnnnnvennernnernuvnnvrrnvnnuennne 3 6 Additional Tools and Materials Required 3 6 Tools and Material Siyeri kaia a aa nn masser eme ententes 3 6 Cables and CONMCCIONS ie svincicauciavatsncnsadesuasvcvakecvadesunssvcabesusseivavevicvecdsvesitesvers 3 6 Hardware Installation Sequence rvvararenannavennnavnnrnnavnrrnnnnnrnnnnunennnnsrennnunennnner 3 6 Outdoor meaane E annee 3 8 Preparing the ODU before Deployment sssssssssssssssssssssssnsnenesennnsennsnnnnrerenrnresenen 3 8 Mounmg te ODs teken de 3 8 Mounting external antennas sisses a E 3 8 Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices xrrannvavvvnnnnnnvnnnvnnvvnnnnnunnnnvenunnnnnnne 3 9 Outdoor Connecfons svsnaann ninnvcsunuaunesvsdsenevsiennnsajeee 3 9 Ve Meraai R 3 9 Installing IDV E and R GANS icuivcsisessicsiscecavessieds suinvevastesveddeveverauvasveevtesviantaceats 3 9 IDU E Installation si2csssniocaniantaventadeuatsegieercaetsnseunctsduiatstecaitavoncdedanteimaatcacccantas 3 IDU R Installations ferssscaccanassaresdanseraszateta
278. taller Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecom munication lines you should remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts Use extreme care when installing antennas near power lines Use extreme care when working at heights When using an AC power source for Wireless Link always use the AC power adapter supplied by the manufacturer Use the right tools In addition to standard tools required for any kind of ODU or antenna installation Wireless Link requires additional specific tools detailed on page 3 6 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 2 Package Contents Chapter 3 Package Contents The Wireless Link packages include the following items ODU Package Contents The ODU package contains e One ODU see Figure 3 2 and Figure 3 3 below for front and rear view e An ODU mounting kit see Figure 3 1 below e ACD containing e the Link Manager e Quick Start Guide e User Manual the document you are reading e Link Budget Calculator e Label showing the MAC address and the alternative Community string The label is self adhesive You should keep this label safe e Cable glands to be used with the ODU IDU cable Figure 3 1 ODU Mounting kit ODU Front View ODU Rear View Figure 3 2 Connectorized ODU Front and rear views Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3 3 IDU E or IDU R package containing Chapter 3 gt a ar ODU Front
279. ted uto Detect v No Action v XX External Alarms Operations Information Rate Maximum Kbps Best Effort v OK Cancel Figure 8 13 Bridge Configuration Site Configuration dialog box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 8 14 Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode Chapter 8 mmi Q 8 dh S Caution ODU Mode This parameter controls the ODU mode with two optional values e Hub Mode in Hub mode the ODU transparently forwards all packets over the wireless link e Bridge Mode In Bridge mode the ODU performs both learning and aging forwarding only relevant packets over the wireless link The aging time of the ODU is fixed at 300 seconds Changing these modes requires system reset IDU Aging time This parameter controls the IDU aging time The aging time parameter controls the time after which each MAC address is dropped from the MAC address learning table The default value is 300 seconds e Any change to these parameters is effective immediately e Each side of the link can be configured separately with different aging times The following table shows the appropriate configuration for several common scenarios Both link sites must be configured with the same parameter Table 8 1 ODU mode configuration for common scenarios Standard default Configuration for Ethernet Applications Bridge 300 sec Rapid network topology changes where fast Lora Hub 1 sec aging is re
280. tennas Exter nal antennas are also available from antenna vendors Link Manager The Link Manager is an SNMP based management application which man ages a complete link over a single IP address It can also manage each side of the link separately Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 13 Accessories Wireless Link User Manual Chapter 1 The Link Manager application facilitates installation and configuration of the link between the ODU units The intuitive easy to use Link Manager has a graphical Microsoft Windows interface and can be run locally and remotely The Link Manager provides Installation Wizard Frequency band selection On line monitoring of air interface quality allowing the administrator to monitor the service and status of each link On line monitoring of equipment alarms and QoS Local and remote loopback testing Configuration Wizard and site settings Integrated software upgrade utility On line user manual and help files Link Budget Calculator for calculating the expected performance of the Wireless Link wireless link and the possible service configura tions for a specific link range The Link Manager can easily be integrated with any SNMP based NMS sys tem Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help LE Link Configuration fig Link TPSF_BTT Link ID EBG 29561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive
281. the Manager application to change the Link Password The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values wbbOduAdmsiteLinkPassword 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 22 DisplayString RW Site Link Password This parameter always returns when retrieving its value lt is used by the Manager application to change the Link Password of the site The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values wbbOduAdmDefaultPassword 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 23 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the current Link Password is the default password wbbOduAdmConnectionType 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 24 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the Manager application is connected to the local ODUor to the remote ODU over the air A value of unknown indicates community string mismatch wbbOduAdmBackToFactorySettingsCmd 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 25 Integer RW Back to factory settings Command A change is effective after reset The read value is always 0 wbbOduAdmipParamsCnfg 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 26 DisplayString RW ODU IP address Configuration The format is lt IP Address gt lt Subnet Mask gt lt Default Gatewa y gt wbbOduAdmvVIanID 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 27 Integer RW VLAN ID Valid values are 1 to 4094 Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware wbbOduAdmVlanPriority 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 28 Integer RW VLAN Priority 0 is lowest priority wbbOduAdmSN 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 29 DisplayString RO ODU Serial Number wbbOduAdmProductName 1 3 6 1 4 1 296
282. the primary air interface due to failure of the receiver to acquire expected TDM data during a period of 24ms Switching to backup e Primary equipment power off either ODU or IDU local or remote e The switching result would be e TDM ports on the primary IDUs turn to tri state e TDM ports on the secondary IDUs become active Backup operation e TDM services are carried by the secondary link Switching back to e Switching back to primary will occur as soon as the Primary link is fully functional for 1 primary second Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 K 16 Appendix L Cascaded Links About Cascaded Links In Chapter 1 we introduced the IDU R as device for automatic backup of leased lines The IDU R monitors the status of leased lines and in the event of a connection failure automatically switches to the radio link You may choose which of the two links is the main link and which is the backup link It may be configured in cascaded links for multi hop The latter situation arises where the trunk to be backed up is longer than the range of Wireless Link Figure L 1below shows a simple cascaded link with two hops ODL ODL A A Station A Station B Figure L 1 Cascaded Link with two hops The trunk to backed up is shown as Trunk2 from IDU A to IDU B The first hop is from ODU A to ODU A The second is from ODU B to ODU B in S amp S If ODU A and ODU B are sited close together the
283. the tower is far away from overhead electric power lines 5 Determine a location for the indoor equipment it should be as close as possible to the ODU At an existing site there is probably an equipment room with cable routing channels The IDU ODU cable length limit is 100m in accordance with IEEE 10 100BaseT standards mmi Q 8 6 Measure and record the path length of the cable from the ODU position to the indoor equipment room 7 Determine the ground and lightning connection points of the installation The ODU and IDU must both be grounded 8 Using the Ohmmeter measure and record the resistance of the required installation to the grounding point The resistance must be less than 10 ohm 9 Review the results of the physical site survey Decide if the site is suitable for the wireless network installation e If the site is suitable continue with stage 3 the RF survey e If the site is not suitable survey another site Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 2 3 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements Chapter 2 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements The ambient outdoor operating temperature should be 35 to 60 C 31 to 140 F Additional Indoor Site Requirements The following requirements guarantee proper operation of the system e For IDU C units allow at least 90 cm 36 of front clearance for operating and maintenance accessibility Allow at least 10 cm 4 clearance at the rear of the unit for
284. tion ODU Mounting ME CONS S eire A 1 Mounting ES EEE EE A 2 M unting OF EEE EE scene niaqodanseiion ene A 3 Mounting an External ANTENNE os ce tece cnnnnn les ti ones sinrin A 3 Appendix B Link Budget Calculator NR NE B 1 LES EE EEE EE ttes tiers B 1 Link Budget Calculator Internal Data vicsecucossiscecsstacsincsisacesstacaveusictarsceavexeteedses B 1 Calcula tOnE erenn a E AAE A B 2 EIRP nnn aE A ee A E B 2 Expected RSS and Fade Mardi mererin niie EEEE B 2 Min and Max RANGE mersis EE B 2 TE EE EEE EE EN ME B 2 Availabilty 2eme agen be ae ra B 2 AES AAI oaia e E esse B 3 About the I RER ERE RER B 3 Running the Link Budget CM sistema B 5 Appendix C Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Groumding Tr Amema CADIE ariig ienueiaiieea C 1 eo r e ES C 2 ODU GROUNDING NE SEE ENE C 2 IDU Grounding EE EE EE ans C 2 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding C3 Internal ESD Protection CCG tes acacicerecsientiraenmeauasinanicdentnemanmieamariniecounaad C 7 Appendix D Preloading an ODU with an IP Address Why this D Needed immenses D 1 ee Hs ING eee entente nt Aaaa EDEA anie Eint aa D 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Te DOCS siiani E EA A D 1 Appendix E Changing the Factory Default Band we S e No nik EEE E 1 POP EEE emmener ann E 1 mation E 1 cChandino Band Tor DF Sensimona dniae EAE E 5 Appendix F Software Upgrade What is the Software Upgrade Utility wiccsecscscsctassiacsnscsc
285. tion 0 0 0 0 G a Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Location Radio Interface RSS dBm Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps amp Fps Ethernet Throughput Mbps TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks E1 Ports IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 780 GHz Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address Events Log 2 Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 6 1 Main window Wireless Link is Active The main window of the Link Manager contains a large amount of informa tion about the link Before proceeding to details of link configuration we set out the meaning of each item in the main window The Link Manager Toolbar In configuration mode the Link Manager toolbar contains the following but tons Sy amp B Pr Bs Link Configuration Lin tallati Site A Site B Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log Off Exit In Installation mode Link Configuration is grayed out and Link Installation is open The button functions are set out in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Link Manager Toolbar Changes configuration parameters of an operating wireless link assigns text files for storing alarms statistics and configuration data This button is disabled until a link installation has been completed Link Configuration Performs preliminary conf
286. tion Rate Selection You may choose a specific modulation rate or use Adaptive Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate C Service Configuration TOM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Services 3xE1 Ethernet Rate Mbps Adaptive Distance IDU Product 7 C 04 BOOO HW Version 3 SW Version 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 B 7 C 04 BO00 3 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Cancel Figure 5 13 Services and Rates dialog Available rates Release 1 9 5 11 Installation Chapter 5 gt To choose a modulation rate 1 Choose Adaptive or one of the available rates 2 Click Evaluate to continue or click the TDM Jitter Buffer tab to set the TDM Jitter Buffer see next section The service is activated as show below Please Wait MINT Activating Service You are returned to the Services and rates dialog of Figure 5 13 Setting Monitored Hot Standby Mode If you are not using Hot Standby Mode you may skip this section To install and use the Hot Standby feature see Appendix I The following procedure can be used to switch links between primary and secondary or to disable the mode gt To set the Hot Standby Mode 1 Click the Hot Standby tab The following dialog appears Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Mode O Primary
287. tions in one of the tables below is met IDU C Alarms Table R 1 IDU C Output Alarms Description Link is down Output 1 Air interface Alarm Link in installation mode Link is up or equipment alarm is ON Link authentication problem e Built in Test BIT error Both ODU and IDU are in operational Output 2 E ment Alarm ae ap e No connection to the ODU state Output 3 Service Alarm at SiteB N A Permanently off 2 Link is up or down without power failure Output 4 Power Failure at Site B Link Loss due to Power Failure at Site B indication within the last two seconds Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 R 1 IDU E AL Alarms Table R 2 IDU C Input Alarms Description Appendix R Input 1 Input 2 User Defined Voltage in range Input3 External Alarm 10 to 50vDC Voltage gt OVDC Input 4 IDU E AL Alarms Table R 3 IDU E AL Output Alarms Description Link is Down Output 1 Air Link Alarm Link in Installation mode Link is up e Link Authentication Problem Built in Test BIT Error Both ODU and IDU Output 2 Equipment Alarm No connection to the ODU Fv sus eN operational state e Incompatible Software At least one of two conditions e Link is up but at least one of the ports with service config ink is down or Link is up and ALL ured at remote is orts with service configured at Output 3 Service Alarm Remote End
288. transmitting power These factors are limited by country regulations The Wireless Link may be operated with an integrated antenna attached to the ODU unit or with an external antenna wired to the ODU via an N type connector All cables and connections must be connected correctly to reduce losses The required antenna impedance is 50Q Frequency bands Frequency Form Type Gain Beam Dimen range 2 4 2 5 4 9 5 3 5 4 5 8 5 9 factor yP width sions GHz GHz GHz GHZ GHz GHz GHz 2 40 2 70 GHz Vv Integrated Flat panel 16dBi 20 1ft 2 30 2 70 GHz v v Integrated Flat panel 17 5dBi 25 1ft E 14 Gri 24dBi 2ft 3ft rid dBi H 10 13 2 400 2 483 GHz V External Omni easi E25 12 H 360 i E 13 2 50 2 70 GHz V External Grid 24dBi H 9 2ft 3ft 4 90 5 10 GHz V External Flat panel 27dBi 5 2ft 4 90 5 00 GHz v External Dish 27dBi 8 2ft 18 5dBi 4 94 6 00 GHz Integrated Flat panel 10 1ft v v v v 22dBi 4 90 5 35 GHz V External Flat panel 21dBi 9 1ft 5 150 5 350 GHz v External Dish 31dBi 59 3ft 5 470 5725 GHz V External Dish 31 5dBi 4 3ft 22dBi 9 1ft 5 15 6 00 GHz v v v v External Flat panel 28dBi 4 5 2ft E 32 0 4ft 5 15 5 85 GHz v External Flat panel 9 5dBi HE73 0 3ft 32 5dBi 3ft 5 725 5 850 GHz v External Dish 6 29dBi 2ft 5 150 5 875 GHz v v v External Flat panel 18dBi 18 0 6ft
289. tructions of the installation wizard to complete setup of the Link Manager program in the desired location Getting Started with the Link Manager If your links are within easy reach you can configure them using the proce dure described below If however your links are to be geographically scat tered it may be convenient to pre load each ODU with its network address prior to physical installation The procedure is quite straight forward and set out in Appendix D Each ODU requires a static IP address since part of the link definition is the E IP address pair of both ODUs Network Managers should ensure that these addresses are outside of the automatic allocation ranges used by their ote network DHCP server gt To start the Link Manager 1 Connect the managing computer to one of the two LAN ports as shown in Figure 4 1 below Figure 4 1 LAN ports on the front panel of the IDU C If you are not using a direct connection as above ensure that you have IDU to managing computer connectivity e g through a LAN 2 Check that you have connectivity to the ODU You can do this by opening up a command line session Start Run and then type cmd At the command prompt type ping 10 0 0 120 You should see something like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 4 2 The Link Manager log on Concept Chapter 4 ct C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2666 lt C Copyright 1985 2061 Mic
290. tuetendvancascesatadansstavantten 1 13 Link Managers susen es sosesananes EE na eee iii annee 1 13 ACCES SONI EE NM EE savers 1 14 Documentation set supplied WER issiria a 1 15 Hon w Use rme MN sirin ER 1 15 EE sosisini EE EAEEREN 1 16 Conventions Used in this Manual scccistscussccensaststsesindaencassoosiscsiansiunsiascdiasvares 1 17 NOUNGBUONS EE ard E FEE 1 17 Typographical CONRVENLIONS siviciecss cuscsvavandavesendssbansusavevesdssvavaveinedsvesensvawenness 1 17 GONG hall EE ET EEE EE 1 17 SONNI SN aa a d aa 1 17 Windows TEHNNOIDAK vais sisccaiceas teas tiacesiccasinisteedtes ia an ei enaa NANEU 1 18 Vemng and PrHnURG ais cacicunccesinesdasvcuunsveasdcenassdevonereesduesedevcuursdvatecannucuneness 1 18 Chapter 2 Site Preparation PTE 9 8 Ta GE 2 1 8 MLE EE NE NE EE E 2 1 HE ETE tu 2 1 14171814 116 110 g ENE EN EE Mine ice 2 1 Recommended EGUIDMEN TE snseses seen manne a o etes ene ken aE 2 1 Stage 1 Preliminary Survey siscticsisiccsssacsscsnrsveasseadecsausseieranaseaaaeniarerebinmecnsaca 2 2 Stoga Pl S ER EAA 2 3 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements x arvrrnvrurnnrnnnrnavnurnnrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnurnuvnnr 2 4 Additional Indoor Site Requirements xr rarvrvnvrnrnnrnnannavnurnnrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnannurnurner 2 4 0 EN 2 4 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 vi Safety PCR REE 3 1 Preventing overexpos re to RF EnergPun mn usvmaumanm maa nanneseseriammnnnieiee 3 1 GOUGING RE EE EE EE tdi a
291. ture ODU Outdoor Unit with Integrated Antenna or Connectorized for External Antenna IDU Indoor Unit for service interfaces or PoE device for Ethernet only IDU to ODU Interface Outdoor CAT 5e cable Maximum cable length 100m TDM Interface Number of Ports 0 1 2 and 4 depending on IDU model Type E1 T1 configurable IDU C E1 or T1 factory preset IDU E Framing Unframed transparent Timing Independent timing per port Tx and Rx IDU C Connector RJ 45 Standards Compliance ITU T G 703 G 826 Line Code E1 HDB3 2 048 Mbps T1 B8ZS AMI 1 544 Mbps Latency Configurable 5 20 ms Impedance E1 1200 balanced T1 1009 balanced Jitter amp Wander According to ITU T G 823 G 824 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Ethernet Interface Ethernet Interface Appendix N Net Throughput Up to 18Mbps full duplex Ethernet ports IDU C 2 IDU E up to 2 PoE Device 1 10 100BaseT with Auto Negotiation IEEE 802 3u Framing Coding IEEE 802 3 Connector RJ 45 Line Impedance 100 Q IDU C 1 SFP port Type Fast Ethernet VLAN Support Transparent Maximum Frame Size 1800ytes Layer 2 self learning of up to 2047 MAC addresses IEEE 802 1Q hub Bridge Bridge selectable mode Latency 3 ms typical Management Management Application Link Manager RNMS Protocol SNMP and Telnet Me
292. two Fresnel zones Odd number Fresnel zones rein force the direct wave path signal even number Fresnel zones cancel the direct wave path signal The amount of the Fresnel zone clearance is determined by the wavelength of the signal the path length and the distance to the obstacle For reliabil ity point to point links are designed to have at least 60 of the first Fresnel zone clear to avoid significant attenuation The concept of the Fresnel zone is shown in Figure B 1 above The top of the obstruction does not extend far into the Fresnel zone leaving 60 of the Fresnel zone clear therefore the signal is not significantly attenuated Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 4 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix B For more about Fresnel zone see http en wikipedia org wiki Fresnel zone Running the Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is supplied on the Link Manager CD It may be run stand alone from the CD or from the Link Manager application gt To run the Link Budget Calculator from the CD 1 Insert the Link Manager CD into the drive on the managing computer In the window which opens click the Link Budget Calculator option 2 If the CD autorun application does not start by itself then point your browser to Z WBB Setup DATA Link Budget Calculator htm where Z should be replaced with your own CD drive name gt To run the Link Budget Calculator from the Link Manager e Choose Help
293. uAdmLicensedTrunks RO Number of Licensed Trunks in the IDU wbblduSrvDesiredTrunks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 2 Integer RW Required trunks bitmap Note that the number of possible trunks that can be configured may vary wbblduSrvServices 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 4 ObjectID RO This parameter is reserved to the Manager application provided with the product wbblduSrvActiveTrunks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 6 Integer RO A bitmap describing the currently open TDM trunks wbblduSrvAvailableTrunks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 8 Integer RO A bitmap describing the number of TDM trunks that can be opened in the current configuration The values take into account the IDU hardware configuration wbblduSrvPossibleServicesTable N A IDU Possible Services table wbblduSrvPossibleServicesEntry N A IDU Services table entry INDEX I wbblduSrvPossibleServicesindex wbblduSrvPossibleServicesindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 1 Integer RO Table index wbblduSrvPossibleTdmServices 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 2 Integer RO Deprecated parameter A bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be opened in the corresponding Air Rate wbblduSrvPossibleEthServices 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 3 Integer RO Deprecated parameter This parameter describes if the Ethernet Service can be openedin the corresponding Air Rate The valid values are disabled 0 wbblduSrvRemainingRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 4 Integer RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps
294. uidelines Meticulous implementation of the guidelines in this appendix will provide best protection against electric shock and lightning A 100 protection is neither implied nor possible This appendix is at best a guide The actual degree of lightning protection required depends on local conditions and regulations m S The Lightning Protection System consists of the following components e Grounding for the antenna coax cable e Grounding for each IDU and ODU e External Primary Surge Suppressor units and grounding for the out door cable e Internal ESD protection circuits over the Power Telecom lines Grounding for Antenna Cable A Grounding Kit must be connected to the coax antenna cable and reliably grounded The grounding kit is an Andrew Type 223158 2 www andrew com See Figure C 1 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 C 1 Grounding for Indoor Outdoor Units Appendix C Antenna Coax cables grounded to the pole within 30 cm of the antenna Connectorized ODU Coax cables grounded to the pole within 30 cm of the ODU 3g Andrew V Grounding Kit Figure C 1 Grounding antenna cables Grounding for Indoor Outdoor Units ODU Grounding Ligtning Protection System uses a Shielded CAT 5e cable to intercon nect the Outdoor ODU and Indoor IDU units However this shielding does not provide a good lightning discharge path Since it can not tolerate the high Lightning Current su
295. unction The NMS will restart the system 10 Connect Wireless Link AIND unit to the external antenna The opera tional link is shown in Figure 2 1 11 Configure Wireless Link NMS at both sites to operate at the pure chan nel frequency found in the RF survey Wireless Link is now ready for operation Configuring the Link 1 Run the Installation Wizard in the Link Managerr Software to set the con figuration of the link Configure the link in accordance with the parame ters calculated in the Link Budget Calculator 2 Wireless Link has a unique identification number the Link Name Each side of the link looks for its partner with the same Link Name Therefore both sides of the link must be configured with the same Link Name 3 The Wireless Link link is now ready for operation Evaluating the Link With the link operating at a pure channel as determined by the RF survey procedure the recommended performance threshold of an Wireless Link link is the following RSS 84 dBm minimum There are cases when there is no line of sight but still the link is of an acceptable quality Troubleshooting If the link is not within the acceptable limit as defined in the previous sec tion Evaluating the Link check the following e Verify that both antennas have the same polarization horizontal vertical e Check all the Wireless Link AIND cable connectors for faulty connec tions e Verify that there are no obstacles
296. unt technology which requires specialized training and equipment for proper servicing For this reason the equipment should be returned to the factory for any PC board repairs The factory is best equipped to diagnose repair and align your unit to its proper operating specifications If return of the equipment is necessary you must obtain a Service Request Order SRO number This number helps expedite the repair so that the equipment can be repaired and returned to you as quickly as possible Please be sure to include the SRO number on the outside of the shipping box and on any corre spondence relating to the repair No equipment will be accepted for repair without an SRO number SRO numbers are issued online at www gemds com support product sro Your number will be issued immediately after the required information is entered Please be sure to have the model number s serial number s detailed reason for return ship to address bill to address and contact name phone number and fax number available when requesting an SRO number A purchase order number or pre payment will be required for any units that are out of warranty or for product conversion If you prefer you may contact our Product Services department to obtain an SRO number Phone Number 585 241 5540 Fax Number 585 242 8400 E mail Address productservices gemds com The equipment must be properly packed for return to the factory The original shipping container a
297. usnsinnenmsneibn menns 9 1 COM II ARE E E mu 9 2 TON LOODI ini E 9 3 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 viii Local Bernal LOODDACK madness ka esse tedentns eds d cida 9 6 Remote Internal LOODDACK unes es snemenn names etes enter etes neii 9 6 Remote External Loopbane anses deqen E AIETEN 9 6 Local Internal LOOPD Ck iuinsmsnjene nessnnnananeseneeran a aaa aaa i 9 7 Reinstalling and Realigning a LINK ssssssssssssssssssrnnnnnssrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnennnne 9 7 LE RE ENEA 9 8 Perormance RE 9 8 The Monitor Logarja EEEE EE EEE 9 8 Saving tne Monitor LOG isean aAa 9 8 Viewing Performance REDONIS sura 9 9 Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar 9 12 Setting Air Interface TihveShOldS iccicassccciverssncascsanccasineareenieccave ire aniihi 9 12 Events Alarms GING TES Smennmmemmmiaimiema 9 13 The Events LOG wisi nes sean annee seau een sen er nee een eden 9 13 EU MANAGE B A ET IT OO A 9 15 Setting the Events Preferences assisia iiai vanene 9 16 SAVING ME EVENE LOG sinni kede means eemeipesnscpese 9 16 Adtive Alans universene eee eee 9 17 VENNE Recent Eventa si ivcscuitn ue siicectennsiteecssuterdavasibesdsteotiesaennennevertunsnanhanss 9 17 sd TE Alert IPS nine ENEE EAEE 9 18 Remote Power Fall NN miennes 9 18 et eg rrisnin nE ka a EAEE EREA 9 19 Ke Ad ODU siriaca a a intl 9 20 Restoring Factory SeU Donnan e 9 20 ATW INS RR A RER 9 20 Customer SUNDE nanas a 9 20 Part 2 Advanced Installation Appendix A Pole and Wall Installa
298. value you must evaluate the expected quality During the evaluation the ETBE Expectecd Time Between Errors bar is displayed You select either Next which performs the change or Back to cancel the change Notice that the Jitter Buffer is configured per site Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 5 13 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby B Size ms 4 Default Size ms A Warning Changing TOM Jitter Buffer size wil affect fhe TOM delay vf Service has been evaluated Click Next to continue IDU A B Product 7 C 04 B000 7 C 04 B000 HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 A Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Evaluation Figure 5 16 TDM Jitter Buffer Configuration ETBE evaluation bar 2 After setting the jitter buffer size if grayed out the Evaluate button is enabled while both Back and Next are disabled as shown in the next figure Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby B Size ms 45 Size ms 45 Warning Changing TDM Jitter Butter size will affect the TDM delay B Product 7 C 04 B000 7 C 04 B000 HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 00_b3065_Jun 7 2009 1 9 00 b3065 Jun 7 2009 IDU A Monitor Lin
299. vents The valid values are 1 2131 where a value of 1 is used to indicate an undefined state wbblduTdmRemoteQualEval 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 9 Integer RO Estimated average interval between error second events during evaluation process The valid values are 1 2131 where a value of 1 is used to indicate an undefined state wbblduTdmSrvEval 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 10 Integer RW Evaluated TDM service bit mask Setting this parameter to value that is bigger than the activated TDM service bit mask will execute the evaluation process for 30 seconds Setting this parameter to 0 will stop the evaluation process immediately wbblduTdmBackupAvailableLinks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 11 Integer RO Number of TDM backup trunks wbblduTdmBackupTable N A IDU TDM Links Statistics table wbblduTdmBackupEntry N A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry INDEX I wbblduTdmBackupindex wbblduTdmBackupindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 12 1 1 Integer RO Table index wbblduTdmBackupMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 12 1 2 Integer RW TDM backup mode Enable or Disable wbblduTdmBackupCurrentActiveLink 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 12 1 3 Integer RO TDM backup current active link N A wbblduTdmyitterBufferSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 13 Integer RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond wbblduTdmyitterBufferDefaultSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 14 Integer RO TDM
300. ver Appendix Q MIB Reference Appendix R External Alarms Specification Appendix S Reserved Appendix T Regional Notice French Canadian Index Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Full Table of Contents Note Lasse ee ee i RESGEVEO sicaciaitesssteccead gence Secues E E cadaty end enctussandaavadeeajaneeed chee ees ii Regulatory Compliance x cccvcccacscecanesdadsnsensesnbeceavanetenneeduandadendpadunvedshaveudsctvcsceuwenchendedesky ede iii Part 1 Basic Installation Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to Wireless EE 1 1 About Release RR EE 1 1 KV APDO RE ea daeencmaniihade da teneHemdinadnaanegatabeniadas 1 2 Cellular Backhathsusmssassmimmmasem ieaie E ovcuvesweuh Goms ka 1 2 Boadband OE DE asie 1 3 Video Surveillance restene E 1 3 Private 0 EE tes etennesaaneteteneneteut ien 1 4 Key Features of Wireless LINK veivecsviveavavevesececuvdansveanceneviedevacesncestvreresnaaade cies 1 5 FT Link Hne 1 6 The Outdoor Unit ODU seinmmsmmkv veska vet a neue en irada 1 6 AIND AN Indoor VA Cinvetnedateanediavivsecedececasevinteeddauactuedissiawteowedes 1 9 The Indoor Unit DU nesrin a kakene 1 9 DE 1 9 DUR 1 10 DEE use 1 10 Power Over Ethernet POE Devices x anrrnxnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 1 11 BASIC POE DEIGEN 1 11 Outdoor POE Device QP0E Lane 1 11 Ea EE EE 1 12 ARtennaSrusvin hundenes dant ennemi oder E 1 12 Flat Panel ANOIMAS AS san a ea allgaste 1 13 P rapolie DIS AEE Su 1 13 Grid AMENNA PRE ER deisen
301. which are largely self explanatory The top section summarizes information about the link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 Link TPSF_BTT Link ID EBG 29561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active For Link status possibilities and color codes see Table 9 2 The two lower left panels show basic link site details IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 The three fields for each site are user definable see page 8 7 ff The Monitor pane The monitor pane is the main source of real time information about link performance at both link sites It includes the following panes top to bot tom e Radio Interface Received Signal Strength RSS in dBm Location A B Radio Interface RSS dBm e Ethernet Service Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Estimated Throughput Mbps CO e Estimated Ethernet Throughput The numbers are the current calculated throughputs at each site The colored bars with Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 6 5 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 numbers indicate the maximum possible throughput having regard for air conditions e Rx and Tx Rates Actual Ethernet t
302. x controls that could access your computer Click here For options WBB Link Budget WBB 8 Link Budget Waming Scripts are disabled In order to use the calculator please enable browser scripts Product Band m Channel Bandwidth su m Click the yellow bar and follow the instructions to allow blocked content e Mozilla FireFox and Google Chrome users may see a warning mes sage like this WEBB Link Budget VBB B Link Budget Waminz This page is optimized for Microsoft Intemet Explorer 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC Integrated v 20 MHz Product Band Channel Bandwidth You may ignore it and continue gt To use the Link Budget Calculator for Wireless Link 1 Choose a band from the drop down list Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 6 Running the Link Budget Calculator WBB B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Appendix B WBB Link Budget R G58 FCC INT R H G58 FCC INT R H G58 IND CO INT R G58 ET SI INT R G59 HP INT POE R H GE0 HP INT WBB w External Antenns R G23 HP EXT R G24 FCC EXT R H G24 FCC EXT R G24 ETSI EXT R H G25 BRS EXT R H G27 HP EXT R H G49 FCC EXT R H G53 FCC CO EXT R G58 HP EXT R H G53 HP EXT R G54 ETSI EXT R G54 ETSI HG EXT R G54 HP EX
303. y The IDU R can now be cascaded to provide Ethernet and TDM redundancy across multiple hops Key Applications Wireless Link systems are ideally suited to meet the needs of cellular carriers service providers and private networks such as private and public enterprises government educational and financial institutions The Wireless Link systems power a range of applications among them e Cellular Backhaul e Broadband Access e Video Surveillance e Private Network Connectivity Cellular Backhaul Wireless Link products enable cellular carriers to expand their networks in both urban and rural areas quickly and cost effectively Wireless Link systems are ideally suited for a broad range of cellular back haul deployment scenarios they empower carriers to expand their presence into remote and low ARPU areas provide enhanced overlay coverage in urban spots and can serve as a temporary or backup backhaul solution Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 1 2 Broadband Access Chapter 1 Figure 1 1 Typical Cellular Backhaul application Broadband Access With Wireless Link service providers can expand their service footprint rap idly and affordably and provide high capacity services that match the ever growing demand for high quality high speed broadband Wireless Link is the ideal solution for last mile access and also powers WiFi backhaul and WiMAX backhaul applications i Figure 1 2 Typical Broadband Access a
304. y a PoE device The camera site uses a PoE connected ODU transmitting at 5Mbps Installation configuration and maintenance of a VS link is substantially the same as for a regular PoE based link VS links are readily collocated using GE MDS HSS system so that a single base mast can accommodate up to 16 camera stations TT T R ge 2 D p ss P P Ne p PNG A s r 4 j p pr p n AN Na ma P bat Sa x a LA 4 gf Pyle RS EG p p I N s Figure M 1 Collocated basic VS configuration Installation Follow the procedures of Chapters 4 to 8 The only substantial difference is in the Services window VS is Ethernet only You must however specify which ODU has the high transmission capacity Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 M 1 Installation Appendix M Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service Configuration Services Ethernet Only Rate Mbps Adaptive Distance O Km 0 Miles Transmission Capacity O Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dBm Figure M 2 VS Services window for VS On completion of the installation the Link Manager main window should look similar to this Link Manager 10 103 31 10 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help k x Link Configuration ik Installat Get Diagnostics F Link TPSF_BTT Location Link ID EBG 20561334 Services Ethernet Only Frequency GHz 5 780 Channel BW M
305. y may require collocation ote Installing Cascaded Links For most part installation of the links follows the standard pattern In both the Installation and Configuration Wizards there is an extra window follow ing Services selection Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 L 1 Installing Cascaded Links Link Configuration Wizard TDM Backup Service Backup Mode Functionality configuration Main Link Selection i Use External Equipment Link Enable Backup Cascaded Link Appendix L 2 2 Q Repeater Line 2 4 Line Repeater Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dBm Figure L 2 Configuring an IDU R in cascaded link To backup a single hop leave Cascaded Link unchecked In a cascaded situation check it and then chose the Line Repeater combination that reflects your setup You should repeat this procedure for the second link making sure that your definition of Line Repeater IDU Rs is consistent Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 L 2 Appendix M Video Surveillance About the Video Surveillance Product GE MDS Video Surveillance solution provides an inexpensive asymmetric link A fast uplink for a real time video stream from a camera site to the surveil lance base and a slower command downlink from the base to the camera site The Video Surveillance VS product belongs to GE MDS Access line A VS link consists of a base ODU transmitting at 2Mbps connected b
306. z Rate 9 Mes PSK 0 75 Ma Tx Power 18 dBm 4 16 Climate Terrain Tx Antenna Gain 22 dB Factor Rx Antenna Gain 2 dB VES Description Cable Loss ob Jaa Po pu Fade Margin e dB maren Tx Power EIRP 38 dBm 6 3 Watt Moderaie Moderate terrain and Min Range 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles C 2 climate Max Range 46 Km 28 6 Miles Dieu Overwater or um a Ss Fe ee Distance Climate J km Mcwco2 ME Expected RSS Fade Margin 81 dBm 6 dB Close Services Ethernet Only M 98 666 availability downtime 7012 min year Ethernet Rate Full Duplex 1 8 Mb s Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Figure B 11 Climactic C Factor description In Figure B 12 we display a map of the world showing C Factor con tours Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 B 11 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix B Hl c 0 25 Good i c Average ii c 2 Moderate Hi c 4 Difficut BC Very Difficult rm EE EE Figure B 12 World map showing C Factor contours 6 Choose the required services WBB B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Recommended antenna height WBB Link Budget R G58 FCC INT v 20 MHz M Auto M EX 5 8 GHz 9 Mois BPSK 0 7

User Manual - GE Digital Energy

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents